JP2023049525A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To solve a problem of decrease in an interest in a game since a performance mode of a game performance is uniform while an interest in a game is enhanced when a game performance having high jackpot reliability is executed in a game machine although a player's interest in a game when a game performance having high jackpot reliability is executed is enhanced and an interest in a game is enhanced further when an advantageous jackpot occurs since game performances (ready-to-win performances, character performances, and the like) include plural game performances in different execution modes, and different jackpot reliability is shown depending on a game performance to be executed.SOLUTION: A game machine for enhancing an interest in a game by various unprecedented game properties is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 49

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In a conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail decision is made with a predetermined probability of a big win, and symbols are variably displayed, and when the result of the win/fail decision is a big win, the symbols are stopped and displayed as the big win symbols, and the big win is displayed. There is a game that executes a jackpot game to open a prize-winning slot. In addition, a game effect (ready effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the pattern, and the possibility that the result of the win/loss determination will be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit pattern and the display is stopped. It showed the possibility of doing (jackpot reliability) (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, as game effects (reach effects, character effects, etc.), a plurality of game effects with different execution modes are provided, and different game effects indicate different degrees of reliability for big hits. As a result, the player's interest in the game is heightened when the game performance with high reliability of the big win is executed, and the interest in the game is further heightened when the big win is advantageous. In addition, as winning games, a plurality of types of winning games having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, and when an advantageous winning game is executed, the interest in the game is enhanced. In addition, by having a plurality of presentation modes with different display modes and executing different presentation modes depending on the game state, the presentation effect is enhanced and boredom of the game is prevented.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583

In the above-described gaming machine, although various game effects and effects modes are executed, the display modes are merely different, and the game is not yet more interesting.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that provides various game performances and enhances the interest in games by means of new performance modes.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
game state setting means for setting a game state;
a game effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
As the game state, having a first specific state,
As the game performance,
and a first count effect, which is an effect executed in the first specific state, and has a first remaining time display unit that indicates the remaining time during which the first specific state is executed by the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. ,
and a battle effect for effecting with the first character and the second character,
In the case where the first count effect is executed, when the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display unit disappears as a result of the variable display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times, the game state changes to A transition from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state,
In the battle effect executed during a period other than the first count effect, when the first character wins, the specific result is obtained and the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the game effects include the first count effect executed in the first specific state and having the first remaining period display section, the battle effect performed by the first character and the second character, have In addition, the first count effect is started when the loss variation is continuously executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game. It becomes a game state more advantageous than the specific state. As for the battle effect during periods other than the first count effect, a special game is executed when the first character wins. As a result, depending on the execution timing (execution period) of the battle production, it is possible to change whether or not the special game is executed in response to the result of the battle production, diversify the game production, and increase the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of game interest by providing game performances of various presentation modes and new performance modes.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between types of winnings and opening patterns of the big winning openings. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a small hit type determination table, (E) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (F) is a normal It is a symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of game production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of game production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of game production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of chance period transition production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of chance period transition production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of chance period transition production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of chance period transition production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of chance period transition production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of remaining period notification effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of remaining period notification effect determination processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the remaining period information production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the remaining period information production|presentation.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In addition, below, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation display of the pattern (when the result of the special pattern propriety determination is a big hit), and the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed. When the game ball that enters the variable ball entrance passes through a predetermined specific area (when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit and the game ball passes through the specific area in the variable ball entrance) Next, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type of one type and two types capable of executing a jackpot game capable of awarding a player with a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, prize balls) will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is a game machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52 and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end and configured to be openable and closable.

In addition, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotational angle) of the player, and can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the shooting device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. In addition, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as a (also simply referred to as "effect button 63") is provided, and a frame lamp 66 for decoration, a speaker 67, and the like are also provided.

The effect button 63 functions as an input means for inputting by the player, and the effect button to be used can be properly used according to the type of game effect. When the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during execution of the game effect, a predetermined operation corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. Incidentally, the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment 1, as long as the player can input, or input means (for example, , appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. .

The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. Also, the game board 2 is provided with board surface lamps 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are projected. In addition, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4 to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3 . A display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a production pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "production pattern display section") in which production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as a "production pattern 8") are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect pattern display area 7b is composed of, for example, three pattern display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". A symbol 8C is displayed, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area.

Each of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R consists of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. Displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4) by the left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b. The result of the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the result of the special symbol validity determination (also simply referred to as "validity determination")), and the second special symbol display device 41b (also referred to as "second special symbol display unit") The result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed in (the result of special symbol propriety determination) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. One or both of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the performance symbol may be simply referred to as "symbol" or "identification information".

For example, if the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with the same three-digit number (also called "hit effect symbol") such as "777" or "555". It is possible. In addition, if the result of the special design success/failure determination is a small hit, the same 3-digit number such as "222" or "666" (also known as "hit effect design") ), or a preset chance pattern such as "135" (a predetermined specific Barakeme pattern in which at least one of the three patterns is different) or "3*3 ” (also referred to as “small hit production pattern”), the production pattern may be stopped and displayed. In addition, in both the case of a big hit and the case of a small win, when the production pattern is stopped and displayed with the same double number of three digits (also referred to as a "hit production pattern"), the case of the big win and the case of the small win are both displayed. Alternatively, the same combination of symbols may be stopped to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between a big win and a small win. In addition, if the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is different. It is possible to stop and display the production pattern.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stop-displayed performance symbols, and conversely, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the game from the stop-displayed performance symbols. becomes possible. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance pattern (pseudo pattern) displayed in the pattern display area 7b is seen and grasped. The positions of the left, middle, and right pattern display areas do not need to be provided separately, and the display areas for the left, middle, and right performance patterns may each be the entire pattern display area (the performance pattern display area 7b). . In addition, as a form of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, there is a form of scroll display in vertical, horizontal, diagonal directions, and the like.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game production using the above-mentioned production patterns (production pattern game production), the winning game production executed in conjunction with the winning game, the customer waiting A demo will be displayed. In addition, in the performance pattern game performance, the winning game performance, and the demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect pending display area 9c (first effect pending display portion) for displaying the first effect pending 9a according to the number of stored first special figure pending described later. , and a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display portion) for displaying the second effect pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figure pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect suspension or the second effect suspension, the number of memories of the first special figure suspension and the second special The memory number of the second special figure reservation displayed on the figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect pattern display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later. Further, on the upper part of the center decoration body 10, there is arranged a decorative member 13 which has an electric decorative member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED and can be turned on according to the game state, and which has characters, figures, or the like. ing.

A movable decorative member 14 is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 so as to be movable along with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. The decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of it is visible. As a result, the player's expectation for winning (big win or small win) is heightened.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination (random number for first special symbol suitability determination) or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the first special symbol (1st special symbol validity determination) is executed and the 1st special symbol is variably displayed, and the 1st special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination (1st special symbol validity determination). .

Below the first starter opening 20, a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starter opening") having a variable second starter opening 21 that changes the ease with which a game ball enters is provided. . Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination (random number for second special symbol suitability determination) or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the second special symbol (second special symbol validity determination) is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the second special symbol is stop-displayed based on the result of the validity determination (second special symbol validity determination).

The variable winning device 22 has a movable member 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and makes it impossible for a game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. there is In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, there is provided a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") that operates when a big winning game, which will be described later, is executed. The first big prize winning device 31 has a first big prize winning port 30 and an opening/closing member 32. The opening operation of the opening/closing member 32 opens the first big prize winning port 30, and the closing operation of the opening/closing member 32 makes the first big prize winning. It closes the mouth 30 . The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state. That is, the first variable ball entrance 31 is in a state where a game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state where a game ball can enter (open state) by opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32. can be changed to

In addition, above the first big winning hole 30 in the game area 3 and in the lower right part of the center decoration 10, a second big winning device 36 ("second variable winning ball (also called mouth) is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 has a second big prize winning port 35 and an opening/closing member (wing member) 37 . This is to close the second big winning port 35 . The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. That is, the second variable ball entrance 36 is in a state where a game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state where a game ball can enter (open state) by opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 37. can be changed to

Inside the second big winning device 36, a specific area 39 (also referred to as a V or V area) through which a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 can pass is formed (provided). In the pachinko game machine 1, when it is detected that at least one of the game balls entering the second big winning hole 35 has passed through the specific area 39, a jackpot game to be described later is started. ing. That is, the specific area 39 serves as a jackpot game start opening. In addition, the second big winning device 36 includes a movable piece (not shown) for creating a state (open state) in which the game ball can pass through the specific region 39 and a state in which it cannot pass (closed state). A member that changes the passability of the game ball) is provided.

This movable piece closes the specific area 39 when the second big winning device 36 is not in operation, that is, when the opening/closing member 37 closes the second big winning port 35, and the second big winning device 36 is activated. Based on the start, that is, the start of the opening operation of the opening/closing member 37 that opens and closes the second big winning hole 35, the operation (predetermined predetermined operation) to open the specific area 39 is started. That is, the movable piece starts to operate as the opening/closing member 37 opens. Further, the movable piece operates in a predetermined operation pattern, and returns to a state in which the specific region 39 is closed based on the lapse of a predetermined operation time. This movable piece is also referred to as "a movable member that permits (opens) or prevents (closes) passage of a game ball to a specific area".

As a result, the game ball enters the opened second big winning hole 35, and the timing of reaching the position (entrance of the movable piece) where the entered game ball is guided to the specific area 39 and the movable piece are specified. When the timing of opening the area 39 coincides, the game ball passes through the specific area 39 (V passage) and a big hit game is started. On the other hand, if those timings do not match, the game ball is discharged out of the machine as it is without passing through the specific area 39, and the jackpot game is not started. Further, as the predetermined operation pattern of the movable piece, an operation pattern may be set in which the closed state and the open state are changed a plurality of times, or the open state or the closed state is changed for a plurality of times with different times. Then, after the start of the predetermined operation pattern, at what timing the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning hole is opened (whether the game ball can enter the state), the game ball to the specific area Passability may vary.

A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 . Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, a normal determination is made as to whether or not the second start port 21 is to be opened. While the symbol suitability determination is executed, the normal symbols are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed based on the results of the normal symbol suitability determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Furthermore, a plurality of general ball entrances 27 are provided at the bottom of the game area 3 .

In this way, the game areas 3 where various ball entrances and the like are arranged are the left game area (first game area) 3A and the right game area (second game area) 3B from the center in the horizontal direction. , can be divided into A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game is started, the ball is aimed to enter the first start hole 20 by striking to the left. On the other hand, when a win (jackpot) is determined based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the game state changes, the gate 28, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, And the ball will aim to enter the second big winning hole 35 . Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole, the second starting hole, the first big winning hole, the second big winning hole, and the general ball entering hole, it is determined in advance at each ball entering hole A number of game balls (also called “prize balls”) are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right portion of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The main display device 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variably displaying and statically displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display for variably displaying and statically displaying the second special symbol. A device 41b (second special symbol display portion), and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably displays and stop-displays normal symbols are included. In addition, on the main display 40, the first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of storage of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol (second 2 special figure suspension) 2nd special figure suspension display 43b that displays the number of memories, and the normal figure suspension display 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation suspension (normal figure suspension) of the normal design display 42 ing.

Also, on the main display 40, a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol right/wrong determination or the second special symbol right/wrong determination is a hit (big win or small win), the first special symbol right/wrong determination or the second A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game executed when the result of 2 special symbol success/failure determination is a hit, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the variable time reduction function (time reduction function) operates, and , and a shooting direction indicator 47 indicating the shooting direction of the game ball, ie, whether the game ball should be shot to the right or to the left. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit, which will be described later.

Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs for 5R and 10R. Then, when the special figure 1 jackpot symbol A, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol B, or the special figure 1 jackpot symbol C is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbols, the lamp for 5R is lit and displayed, "5R▲10R△" (for example, ▲: lighting, △: lighting off). Further, when the special figure 2 jackpot pattern A is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern, the lamp for 10R is lit and displayed. These lamps are lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbols are determined and stopped. In addition, when the big win is achieved based on passing through the specific area via the small win, the number of rounds obtained by adding 1 to the number of open games of the small winning game to the number of rounds of the big winning game executed after passing through the specific area is indicated. turn on the lamp. Specifically, when the special figure 2 small winning symbol A or the special figure 2 small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed as the small winning symbol, and the game ball passes through the specific area in the second big winning hole opened by the small winning game. , a lamp for 10R, which is obtained by adding 1 round for a small hit to 9 rounds, is lit and displayed. Specifically, it becomes a display mode like "5RΔ10R▴". In addition, when the special figure 2 small winning symbol C or the special figure 2 small winning symbol D is stopped and displayed as the small winning symbol, and the game ball passes through the specific area in the second big winning hole opened by the small winning game. , the lamp for 5R, which is four rounds plus one round for a small hit, is lit and displayed.

The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by (based on) entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 . The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols. Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. FIG. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped, and the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 according to the stopped and displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery based on (judgment, special pattern propriety judgment, big hit lottery, small lottery etc.) is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol suitability determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern), the release according to the type of the specific special pattern (hit type) that is stopped and displayed A special game (big win game or small win game) is performed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in a pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a plurality of display modes ( 256 patterns) can be displayed. Similarly, the second special symbol display 41b is also composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and it is possible to display multiple display modes (up to 256 ways) by combining the lighting and extinguishing of each LED. It has become. Then, the first special symbol display 41a displays a special symbol (first special symbol) corresponding to the result of the first special symbol validity determination, and the second special symbol display 41b displays the result of the second special symbol validity determination. The corresponding special symbol (second special symbol) is displayed. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. In this manner, each LED can be turned on.

In the first embodiment, three types of "special figure 1 jackpot A to C" are provided as the jackpot types when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a jackpot (Fig. 6 (A) to (C) )). In addition, as a result of the first special symbol propriety determination, a small hit is not provided. Then, these big hits are displayed so as to be identifiable by the display mode of the first special symbol display device 41a. For example, if the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, if the type is "special figure 1 big hit A", the three LEDs of "ijn" are lit and the rest are extinguished, "special figure 1 jackpot B", the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, for the other special figure 1 jackpot, a display mode different from the other jackpots is defined. Also, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out, the two LEDs of "lo" are lit and the rest are extinguished. In addition, even if the result of the special symbol propriety determination is "special figure 1 big hit A", depending on the game state at that time (normal state, first time saving state, second time saving state), transition after the big hit game It is set so that the game state to be played is different.

In addition, one type of "special figure 2 big hit A" is provided as a kind of big hit when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a big hit (see FIGS. 6 (A) to (C)), and a small hit and a small hit. Four types of "special figure 2 small hits A to D" are provided as types of small hits when it becomes (see FIGS. 6 (A) to (C)). Similar to the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b is identifiably displayed by the display mode (combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED). In addition, the display mode of the special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to each hit (big hit and small hit) is one display for a plurality of hit types (including modes where only the operating state of the time saving function and the open extension function is different) It is possible to use one display mode for one hit, or a plurality of display modes for one hit, and similarly, one or more display modes can be used for a loss. It is possible. When a plurality of display modes are used, for example, a display mode may be selected by random number lottery or the like, and display control of the special symbol display section 41 may be performed based on the selected display mode.

In the present embodiment 1, when the display mode of the stopped special symbol (stop symbol) is a big win (first specific mode) or a small win (second specific mode), the game is played according to the type of the big win or small win. The contents of the benefits given to the person are different. Details on this point will be described later.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquired information”) such as a random number for judging whether or not a special symbol Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball is entered into the first start port 20, it is stored as the first special figure hold in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown), and if the ball is entered into the second start port 21 It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) as the second special figure reservation. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit. The reserved memory is "4". These first special figure reservation storage unit and second special figure reservation storage unit are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". In addition, the number of special figure reservations (upper limit) that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit can be set arbitrarily in consideration of game playability and specifications at the stage of game machine design, and the first special figure reservation The upper limit value is the same in the storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, the upper limit value of the first special figure reservation storage unit is set higher than the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation storage unit, or the second special figure It is possible to increase the upper limit value of the reservation storage unit than the upper limit value of the first special figure reservation storage unit.

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage part is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the special symbol suitability determination random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation, and execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbols Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the entered ball, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). is "1", the "u" LED is extinguished and the "v" LED is lit in red, such as "u v". If the number of holds is 3, both LEDs are displayed in red, such as "u v". If the number of reservations is "4" (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green, such as "u▲v▲".

In addition, the second special figure pending display device 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LED according to the number of the second special figure pending, the second special figure pending It displays numbers. For example, if the number of holds is "0", the display mode is to turn off both LEDs, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights red), and if the number of holds is "1" The display mode is such that the "w" LED is turned off and the "x" LED is turned on in red, such as "w x". w" LED is lit in red and the "x" LED is extinguished. If the number is "4" (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green, such as "w▴x▴".

The variable display of normal symbols is triggered by (based on) the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 . In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the results of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 are displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is played to open the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination by its lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the winning normal symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ■: lighting, □: lighting off). In addition, when the determination result is out, the out normal symbol is displayed such that only the LED of "t" lights up, such as "s□t■". It should be noted that the normal design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed over a predetermined variable time. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether a normal symbol is right or wrong is acquired based on the passage of the game ball. is temporarily stored as a normal map reservation in a normal map reservation storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit is digested when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of its passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of normal pattern reservations stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit is displayed on the general pattern reservation display 44 . Specifically, the normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of normal map reservations. be. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the LED of "q" is turned off and the LED of "r" is turned on in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also referred to as a "main control unit", which performs control related to game progress and game profits, such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, game state transition, etc.). A sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", also referred to as a "production control unit") that performs control related to the performance executed with the progress of the game (also referred to as a "game control unit"), and controls related to the payout of game balls. Payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) to be performed, production pattern 8 displayed on image display device 7, pattern displayed on production display device 102, production first special figure reservation display 103a, and production second It has an image control board 100 (image control unit) and the like that perform display control of the 2 special figure holding display 103b and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided at substantially the center of the rear surface side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case is a main control board housing case. is provided with a storage case for image control boards, etc., in which the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 are stored, and a sub control board storage case, in which the sub control board 90 is stored, is provided on the storage case for the image control boards, etc. A case is provided. A payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing a power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. In the RAM of the game control microcomputer 81, the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage unit (first special figure reservation storage unit and second special figure reservation storage unit), normal figure reservation storage unit, power supply voltage (power) drop detection backup area 161 ("main control Also referred to as a "backup area" or "memory holding means"), etc. are provided. This backup area 161 stores game state information (game information) to be backed up in advance among the information stored in the RAM (game information storage means) of the main control unit 80 after the power supply is stopped. is also a save area for storing data for a predetermined period of time. Then, when the power supply is restarted, based on the game state information stored and held in the backup area 161, it is possible to restore (restorate) the predetermined game state when the drop in the power supply voltage is detected. . These processes are also called "game state information recovery means".

Further, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. is provided with a power supply substrate 109 for supplying The power supply board 109 is provided with a power supply unit 83 for supplying drive power to each control board and the like, and a voltage drop monitoring circuit 84 for monitoring a drop in the power supply voltage supplied to the power supply board. ing. In addition, the power supply board 109 serves as a switch for a game clerk or the like to perform a predetermined input operation. A power switch 88 that can start or stop the supply of power supply voltage, and a backup area provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and a backup provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 110 by performing a predetermined input operation A RAM clear switch 83 (game information erasing means) for erasing and initializing the stored contents of the area is provided. This power supply board 109 is also called "power supply means". Moreover, the power supply board 109 may be configured by a single board, or may be configured by a plurality of boards. This is the same for the main control board 80, the payout control board 110, the sub control board 90, and other control boards.

When only the power switch 88 is turned ON in a state where power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 (power OFF state), the power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109, and from the power supply board 109 to various control boards. Required drive power is supplied. Then, when the game state information at the time of power OFF (at the time of power decrease) is normally stored (retained) in the backup area, based on the game state information, the game at the time of power OFF (at the time of power decrease) After recovering the state, it is set to a playable state (game is started) (this is also called "game state information restoration means"). On the other hand, when the power switch 88 is turned on, when the power switch 88 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 83 for a predetermined period, the input information (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch from the power supply board 109 is the main control. If there is game state information input to the unit 80 and the payout control unit 110 and stored in the backup area (the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110), the stored game state information is erased and initialized. Then, the game is put into a playable state (the game is started) (this is also called "game state information initialization means"). As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be initialized to the initial state.

When erasing the stored (backed up) game state information by operating the RAM clear switch, among the stored game state information, the game state information excluding specific game state information (game state information to be erased) may be deleted only. The game state information that is not erased even by this RAM clear (initialization) operation is called "specific game state information". "Specific game state information" is, for example, a base value (first base value, second base value), which can be used to check the operating status of the game machine, or to check whether a third party (police, inspection agency, etc.) This is game information used when inspecting the In addition, other game state information (for example, unpaid prize ball information, state information (probability variation, time reduction, jackpot), game mode information (production mode information), error information, jackpot game end (previous jackpot game) The number of fluctuations of special symbols, the number of fluctuations of special symbols from the initial state, etc.) are to be erased by the RAM clear (initialization) operation.

In addition, the voltage drop monitoring circuit 84 monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC24V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the voltage value to be monitored drops to a predetermined value. Then (when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected), a "power-off signal" indicating this is output to the CPU of the main control unit 80, the CPU of the payout control unit 110, etc. (see FIG. 6) . In addition, the CPU of the main control board 80 and the CPU of the payout control board 110, which have received the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 109, store and hold the game state information stored in their respective RAMs in backup areas. power off monitoring process. Here, in the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110, the storage area for storing the game state information during the game is also called "game information storage means", and is backed up when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected. A backup area for storing target game state information is also referred to as "storage holding means".

Also, part or all of the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110 are used as a backup area, and are backed up by the backup power supply (backup voltage) of the power supply section 82 of the power supply board 109 . That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power failure or power OFF operation, for a predetermined period (a few days until the capacitor as a backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power) , the contents (game state information) of the backup target (memory retention target) stored in these RAMs are stored (memory retention). This game state information includes at least game state information (information indicating probability state (low probability or high probability), information indicating base state (low base or high base)), special game end or special symbols from the initial state. Counter information indicating the number of fluctuations (first special symbol and second special symbol), that is, data according to the control state of the main control unit (special symbol status flag, normal symbol status flag, pending storage counter value, specific Counter value, variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc.) and data indicating the number of undistributed prize balls (undischarged prize ball information).

These game state information are saved (stored) in a backup area (backup RAM) in which power supply is maintained by a backup power source. It should be noted that "data corresponding to the control state of the main control unit" means that after a power failure, etc., when the power supply is restarted, the control state (game state) will be changed. This data is necessary for restoring the control state (game state) to the time (before the power failure occurred). In addition, although not shown, the RAM of the sub-controller 90 is also provided with a backup area in the same way as the main controller 80 and the like. The number of pending memories, look-ahead information, probability variable flag, time saving flag, etc.) can be stored, and the contents of the backup area of the RAM may be saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start sensor 20a, a second start sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big prize sensor 30a, a second big prize sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and general sensors. An entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also called "detection means".

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. As shown in FIG. The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The specific area sensor 39 a is provided in the specific area 39 within the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 . The general ball entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 and detects a game ball entering the general ball entrance 27 .

In addition to these sensors, a non-specific area sensor is provided in the second large winning opening 35 to detect that the game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 does not pass through the specific area 39. may As a result, it is detected that the game ball that has entered the second big prize hole has passed either the specific area sensor or the non-specific area sensor, and the game ball stays in the second big prize hole (ball If a clogging or illegality occurs, it is possible to promptly resolve the situation by announcing the situation as an error.

As solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33, and the second big winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 . The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 .

Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a normal symbol display. A figure hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a shooting direction indicator 47 and a win indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 .

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 includes a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like). (which enables ball lending based on the information received) is connected, and a launcher 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 operates the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 through the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 changes the shooting handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. . The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90 . The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Display control of the device 7, the production display 102, the production first special figure suspension display 103a, and the production second suspension display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production patterns, pending patterns, etc.). and image data such as background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The performance display device 102 consists of two LEDs, and performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the performance pattern 8, and the two LEDs are turned on and off, or by combining colors. The stop display is performed in a display mode showing the display result of the symbol 8 (the result of the special symbol propriety determination). Moreover, the production 1st special figure suspension display 103a and the production 2nd suspension display 103b are also made up of two LEDs. Then, by lighting / extinguishing of two LEDs, or a combination of colors, the production 1st special figure reservation indicator 103a is the number of reservations displayed in the 1st production reservation display area 9c and the 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the displayed pending number. In addition, the second special figure pending display 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number displayed in the second effect pending display area 9d and the second special figure pending display 43b. controlled. This is done by displaying the character design on substantially the entire display screen 7a (performance design display section), or by operating the movable decorative member 14 to cover the performance design display area 7b (performance design display section) of the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible that part or all of the effect pattern, the first effect pending display part, or the second effect pending display part cannot be visually recognized, so such a display is provided. Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 .

In addition, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the production control microcomputer 91 provides light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5. , lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

Furthermore, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 to drive the movable decoration. The member 14 is activated. As described above, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 (behind the decorative member 13). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "driving data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Also, the sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch. The first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b are collectively referred to simply as "effect buttons", and the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are collectively referred to simply as "effect button detection switches." ” is also called.

Next, the control related to the winning/losing determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, there are "big win (first result, first specified result)", "small win (second result, second specified result)", and "loss" as the result of special symbol suitability determination. In the case of a "big win", the special symbol display portion 41 stops displaying the "big win symbol" (first specific identification information). Further, at the time of the "small win", the special symbol display portion 41 stops displaying the "small win symbol" (second specific identification information). In addition, when "missing", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays "missing symbol". When it is determined as a big win or a small win, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped special symbol. . A special game executed as a big win is called a "big win game", and a special game executed as a small win is called a "small win game (secondary game)".

There are a plurality of types per the first embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 6 (A) to (C), there are "special figure 1 big hits A to C" as hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) As types, there are "special figure 2 big hit A" and "special figure 2 small hits A to D", and stop patterns (big hit pattern, small hit pattern) are provided according to the type of each hit. In the special figure 1 big win, the first big winning opening 30 is opened, and in the special figure 2 big winning and the special figure 2 small winning, the second big winning opening 35 is opened. Therefore, the first big winning hole 30 provided in the lower area (downstream side) of the game area is dedicated to when the first special symbol success/failure determination results in a big hit (first special symbol dedicated, first identification information dedicated). It is considered to be a large winning mouth that is driven as. In addition, the second big winning hole 35 provided in the upper area (upstream side) of the game area than the first big winning hole 30 is dedicated (second 2 dedicated to special symbols, dedicated to second identification information). It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, the first big winning opening is exclusively driven for big wins when a big hit is achieved in the first special symbol success/failure determination, and when a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol success/failure determination. The second big winning opening is dedicated to small winning (small winning) when the small winning is achieved by the judgment of the second special symbol, and when the big winning is achieved by passing through the specific area. V only) may be used as a large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game state has a normal state (low base state), a first time saving state (high base state), and a second time saving state (high base state). The game state set after the end of the big win game may differ (or may be the same) depending on whether the big win is achieved in the game state of . Here, the difference between the first time saving state and the second time saving state will be described. The first time-saving state is provided with a time-saving function (open extension function) for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Then, after the first time saving state is set, even before the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 15th rotation), the time saving function (open extension function) is performed based on the occurrence of a small hit. is set to end.

That is, the first time-saving state, after the first time-saving state is set, the number of times of variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) (during this period, there is neither a big hit nor a small hit), In addition, even if the number of times of variable display of special symbols becomes a small hit before the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is executed, the time saving function (open extension function). Therefore, when a small hit occurs in the first time-saving state, a small-hit game aiming at passage of the game ball to the specific area is executed in the low base state (normal state). In the small winning game executed in this low base state (normal state), when the game ball passes through the specific area, it becomes a big winning, and the big winning game is executed. After the jackpot game ends, a predetermined game state is set.

Moreover, the 2nd time saving state is given the time saving function (open extension function) of predetermined times (for example, 90 times). Then, even if a small hit occurs before the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches a predetermined number after the second time saving state is set (for example, the 15th rotation), the time saving function (open extension function) does not end. state. That is, the second time-saving state, after the second time-saving state is set, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 90 times) (during this period, there is neither a big hit nor a small hit) , to end the time saving function (open extension function). Therefore, when the small hit is achieved in the second time saving state, the small winning game aiming at passing the game ball to the specific area is executed in the high base state (second time saving state, time saving state). In the small hit game executed in this high base state (second time saving state, time saving state), when the game ball passes through the specific area, it becomes a big hit and the big win game is executed. After the jackpot game ends, a predetermined game state is set.

In this way, the first time saving state is a game state in which the time saving state is ended by a small win, and the second time saving state is a game state in which the time saving state is not ended by a small win. As a result, the first time saving state and the second time saving state are both time saving states, but the small winning game is executed in the low base state (first time saving state) and in the high base state. It is different from the state (second time saving state) in that it is. Also, in the first time-saving state, when a small winning game is played and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big winning, the big winning is determined to be a big winning occurring in the low base state. Also, in the second time-saving state, when a small winning game is played and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big winning, the big winning is determined to be a big winning occurring in the high base state.

In this way, the first time saving state and the second time saving state are different in the timing of ending the time saving state, so that the game state at the timing of passing through the specific area and becoming a big hit is different, and depending on the game state, A different game state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game. Concretely, in the first time saving state, the small winning game is executed, the game ball passes through the specific area, and the big winning game is executed, in the flow in which the small winning game is executed. Terminate the time-saving state as an opportunity. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state, a small win is made and a small-hit game is executed, the game ball passes through a specific area, a big win is made, and a small-hit game is executed in the second time-saving state. Instead, the time saving state is ended with the big hit as a trigger.

In the first time saving state, even if a small hit occurs before the number of times of variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the first time saving state is set, at that time, the time saving state is triggered by the small hit. , it was not possible to pass the game ball through the specific area in the subsequent small winning game (the game ball was not fired, or it was fired but could not pass through the specific area) In this case, the game is played in the normal state (low base state) without executing the big win game after the end of the small win game.

On the other hand, in the second time saving state, even if a small hit occurs before the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches a predetermined number after the second time saving state is set, the time saving state is triggered by the small hit at that time. , it was not possible to pass the game ball through the specific area in the subsequent small hit game (the game ball was not fired, or it was fired but could not pass through the specific area) In this case, the big winning game is not executed after the end of the small winning game, but the game is played while the second time saving state (high base state) remains as the gaming state. From this point, the second time saving state (third game state) can be said to be a game state more advantageous for the player than the first time saving state (second game state). In addition, since the time saving function (open extension function) operates in the first time saving state (second game state), it can be said that the game state is more advantageous for the player than the normal state (first game state).

As described above, in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, different timings are set as timings for ending the time saving state even in the same time saving state. By having such multiple time-saving states, the game ball enters the big winning hole opened with the small hit, and the game ball passes through the specific area ("big hit via small hit" or " In the big hit that occurs in the small win V"), the game state at the time of the big win is varied depending on the time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state). Further, as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6C, even if the type of winning is the same, it is set after the end of the big winning game depending on the game state at the time of the big winning (big winning by the small winning V). Game conditions may vary.

Specifically, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as described above, in the normal state (low base state), a game ball is entered into the first start hole 20 by hitting to the left to progress the game. Therefore, it becomes a game centered on the execution of the first special symbol propriety determination. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the normal state (low base state), the first special symbol validity determination is executed, and when the result of the first special symbol validity determination becomes the special figure 1 jackpot A, the first large A jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed to open the prize winning opening (to enable ball entry). Further, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, the probability that the big hit is a special figure 1 big hit A is set to 15%. After the end of the jackpot game related to the special figure 1 jackpot A, the first time saving state is set in which the number of times of time saving (operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set to 90 times.

Also, in the normal state, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 1 jackpot B, the jackpot game of 5 rounds to open the first jackpot is executed. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, the probability that the big hit is a special figure 1 big hit B is set to 35%. After the end of the jackpot game related to the special figure 1 jackpot B, the first time saving state is set in which the number of times of time saving (operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set to 50 times. Also, in the normal state, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is the special symbol 1 jackpot C, a 5-round jackpot game for opening the first jackpot is executed. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, the probability that the big hit is a special figure 1 big hit B is set to 50%. After the end of the big hit game related to the special figure 1 big hit B, the first time saving state is set in which the number of time saving times (the operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set five times.

The jackpot games executed when the special figure 1 jackpot A to the special figure 1 jackpot C are obtained are all the number of times the first big prize winning port 30 is opened and the opening time per round, "once" and " 25 seconds” is set as a jackpot. Therefore, the game ball can be easily entered into the first prize-winning hole 30 simply by performing a shooting operation according to the shooting navigation executed by the gaming machine (for example, "Please hit to the right!!"). In the jackpot game, it is possible to receive payout of about 500 game balls (gain a game profit). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol success/failure determination is executed in the normal state and the jackpot is achieved, the more advantageous second time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, and all the first time saving states are set. is set to Although details will be described later, when a specific jackpot is achieved in the first time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the second time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, although it is not a determination mainly performed in the normal state, when the player accidentally or intentionally hits to the right, the second special symbol right/wrong determination may be performed even in the normal state. In addition, in the normal state (non-time-saving state), the fluctuation time of the normal design is set longer than the time-saving state (see FIG. 8 (F)), and the hit probability of the normal design propriety determination is also set lower than the time-saving state. (See FIG. 8(E)). Therefore, in the normal state, even if the player hits to the right, the frequency at which the second special symbol validity determination is executed per unit time is much lower than that of the first special symbol validity determination. The game cannot be played efficiently.

In the normal state, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is the special figure 2 jackpot A, a 10-round jackpot game for opening the second jackpot is executed. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a big hit, the probability that the big hit will be the special figure 2 big hit A is 100% (that is, the kind of big hit is set to one type). After the end of the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 jackpot A, the second time saving state is set in which the number of times of saving time (operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set to 500 times. The second time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is set to 500 times is the most advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, in the normal state, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit A and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the second big prize opening is opened and the big hit of 10 rounds. Execute the game. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a small hit, the probability that the small hit is a special figure 2 small hit A is set to 25%. Then, after the big hit game related to the big hit that has passed through the specific area as the special figure 2 small hit A, it is set to the first time saving state in which the number of time saving times (operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set 90 times. be done. In addition, in the normal state, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is the special figure 2 small hit B and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the second big prize opening is opened. Execute the game. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a small hit, the probability that the small hit is a special figure 2 small hit B is set to 20%. Then, after the big hit game related to the big hit that has passed through the specific area as the special figure 2 small hit B, it is set to the first time saving state in which the number of time saving times (operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set 50 times. be done.

In addition, in the normal state, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is the special figure 2 small hit C and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the second big prize opening is opened 5 rounds of big win. Execute the game. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a small hit, the probability that the small hit is a special figure 2 small hit C is set to 20%. Then, after the big hit game related to the big hit that has passed through the specific area as the special figure 2 small hit C, it is set to the first time saving state in which the number of time saving times (operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set 90 times. be done. In addition, in the normal state, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit D and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the second big prize opening is opened and the big hit of 5 rounds is made. Execute the game. In addition, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a small hit, the probability that the small hit is a special figure 2 small hit D is set to 35%. Then, after the big hit game related to the big hit that passed through the specific area as the special figure 2 small hit D, it is set to the first time saving state in which the number of time saving times (operation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) is set 50 times. be done.

The jackpot game executed when the special figure 2 jackpot A is obtained is a jackpot with the number of openings of the second jackpot 35 and the opening time of ``1 time'' and ``25 seconds'' per round. is set. Therefore, the game ball can be easily entered into the second prize-winning hole 35 simply by performing a shooting operation according to the shooting navigation executed by the game machine (for example, "Please hit to the right!!"). In the jackpot game, it is possible to receive payout of about 1000 game balls (gain a game profit). Further, as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6C, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit, all the games are set to the second time-saving state after the big win game ends. In addition, in the normal state (low base state), only when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 jackpot A, the game state after the jackpot game ends is the most advantageous to the player. It is set to the second time saving state. When a big win is achieved in other modes, the game state after the end of the big win game is set to the first time-saving state.

In addition, even if the result of the special symbol success/fail judgment is a big hit (a direct hit), the big hit in the normal state is a small hit after passing through the specific area. V), the gaming state at the timing of the big win is all in the low base state (normal state).

Next, a game execution mode in the first time saving state will be described. As described above, in the first time-saving state (high-base state) and the second time-saving state (high-base state), the game proceeds by entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 by hitting to the right. Therefore, it becomes a game centered on the execution of the second special symbol propriety determination. In the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal design is set shorter than the normal state (see FIG. 8 (F)), and the hit probability of the normal design propriety determination is also set higher than the normal state. (See FIG. 8(E)). As a result, in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, the frequency of hitting the second starting hole by hitting with the right hand is higher than the frequency of hitting the first starting hole by hitting with the left hand, and the second special The fluctuation time of the pattern is also set short. Therefore, the frequency of the special symbol suitability determination executed per unit time is higher for the second special symbol suitability determination than for the first special symbol suitability determination. Therefore, the first time-saving state (high-base state) and the second time-saving state (high-base state) are more advantageous for the player to execute the second special symbol propriety determination by hitting to the right, and the game can be played efficiently. It can be carried out.

As described above, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are played by executing the second special symbol propriety determination by hitting to the right if normal, but relate to the so-called first hit (big hit in the normal state) When the reservation information related to the first special symbol remains after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol success/failure determination can be executed even in the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. Also, when the player accidentally or unintentionally hits left and the game ball enters the first start hole, the first special symbol right/wrong determination can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 6(B), in the first time saving state (high base state), the first special symbol validity determination is executed, and the result of the first special symbol validity determination becomes the special figure 1 jackpot A, special After the jackpot game related to the jackpot A in FIG. 1 is completed, the second time-saving state is set in which the number of times of time-saving (operation of the time-saving function and the opening extension function) is set to 90 times. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 6, the number of rounds of the big win game and the distribution probability of the big win type do not change even if the game state changes, so the explanation is omitted.

In the first time-saving state (high base state), the first special symbol propriety determination is executed, and when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination becomes the special figure 1 jackpot B, after the jackpot game related to the special figure 1 jackpot B is completed. is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set. In the first time-saving state (high base state), the first special symbol propriety determination is executed, and when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination becomes the special figure 1 jackpot C, after the jackpot game related to the special figure 1 jackpot C is completed. is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set.

As described above, the first time-saving state is a game state (becomes a normal state) in which the time-saving state ends even when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination becomes a small hit. When the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit (big hit direct hit), the timing of the big hit is a high base state (time saving state), so it will be any of the special figure 1 big hits A to C. Even in this case, after the jackpot game is finished, the second time-saving state is set to be most advantageous to the player in which the number of times of time-saving is set to 90 times.

Also, in the first time-saving state (high base state), the second special symbol propriety determination is executed, and when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination becomes the special figure 2 jackpot A, the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 jackpot A After the end, it is set to the second time-saving state in which 500 times of time-saving times (operation of the time-saving function and the open extension function) are set. When the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit (big hit direct hit), the timing of the big hit is a high base state (time saving state), so if the special figure 2 big hit A is a big hit After the game is over, the second time-saving state is set to be most advantageous to the player in which the number of times of time-saving is set to 500 times.

In addition, in the first time-saving state (high base state), the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit A, and when the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the first time-saving state in which 90 times of time-saving times (operation of time-saving function and open extension function) are set. Also, in the first time-saving state (high base state), when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit B and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the first time-saving state in which 50 times of time-savings (operation of time-saving function and open extension function) are set.

Also, in the first time-saving state (high base state), when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit C and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the first time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set. Also, in the first time-saving state (high base state), when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit D and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the first time saving state in which 50 times of time saving (activation of the time saving function and the opening extension function) are set.

Since the first time-saving state is a game state that ends the time-saving state even when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination becomes a small hit (becomes a normal state), the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a special figure 2 small. In any of the hit A to the special figure 2 small hit D, the game state shifts to the low base state at that timing, and the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area in the subsequent small win game, that is, the big hit. The timing will be in the low base state. That is, in the first time-saving state, if a big hit is achieved by passing through the specific area via the special figure 2 small hits A to special figure 2 small hits D, it is determined that the big hit is made in the low base state. be done. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is exactly the same game state as when passing through the specific area via the special figure 2 small win A to the special figure 2 small win D and becoming a big win in the normal state. (see FIGS. 6A and 6B).

As described above, in the first time-saving state, if normal, by hitting to the right, the game ball is entered into the second starting port, and the game proceeds mainly by judging whether the second special symbol is right or wrong. Therefore, in order to shift from the first time-saving state to a more advantageous second time-saving state, the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big win, and it is necessary to execute a big win game. When a big win is achieved via a small win, the first time saving state is set after the big win game ends, and the second time saving state is never set. As a result, the player does not just want to win a big win, but pays attention to the mode of transition to a big win (whether it is a direct hit of a big win or a small win V), and can enhance the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 6(C), in the second time saving state (high base state), the first special symbol validity determination is executed, and the result of the first special symbol validity determination becomes the special figure 1 jackpot A, special After the jackpot game related to the jackpot A in FIG. 1 is completed, the second time-saving state is set in which the number of times of time-saving (operation of the time-saving function and the opening extension function) is set to 90 times. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 6, the number of rounds of the big win game and the distribution probability of the big win type do not change even if the game state changes, so the explanation is omitted.

In the second time-saving state (high base state), the first special symbol propriety determination is executed, and when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination becomes the special figure 1 jackpot B, after the jackpot game related to the special figure 1 jackpot B is completed. is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set. In the second time-saving state (high base state), the first special symbol propriety determination is executed, and when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination becomes the special figure 1 jackpot C, after the jackpot game related to the special figure 1 jackpot C is completed. is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set.

As described above, the second time-saving state is a game state in which the time-saving state does not end even if the result of the special symbol success/failure determination becomes a small hit (while the time-saving state remains). When the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit (big hit direct hit), the timing of the big hit is a high base state (time saving state), so it will be any of the special figure 1 big hits A to C. Even in this case, after the jackpot game is finished, the second time-saving state is set most advantageous to the player in which the number of times of time-saving is set to 90 times. That is, when the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit (big hit direct hit), the game state after the end of the big win game is set to the same game state as the first time-saving state.

Also, in the second time-saving state (high base state), the second special symbol propriety determination is executed, and when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination becomes the special figure 2 big hit A, the big hit game related to the special figure 2 big hit A After the end, it is set to the second time saving state in which 500 times of time saving (operation of the time saving function and the open extension function) are set. When the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a big hit (big hit direct hit), the timing of the big hit is a high base state (time saving state), so if it becomes a special figure 2 big hit A, a big hit After the game is over, the second time-saving state is set to be most advantageous to the player in which the number of times of time-saving is set to 500 times. Since this is also a big hit direct hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is set to the same game state as the first time saving state.

In addition, in the second time-saving state (high base state), the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit A, and when the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set. Also, in the second time-saving state (high base state), when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit B and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set.

Also, in the second time-saving state (high base state), when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit C and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set. Also, in the second time-saving state (high base state), when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 2 small hit D and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, after the end of the big hit game is set to the second time saving state in which 90 times of time saving (operation of time saving function and open extension function) are set.

The second time-saving state does not end the time-saving state even if the result of the special symbol success/failure determination becomes a small hit, and is a continuous (remaining time-saving state) game state, so the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is special. Even when any of the small hits A to D of the special figure 2 is achieved, the game state does not shift to the low base state at that timing, and the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area in the subsequent small win game. Even in , the short working hours state (high base state) continues. That is, the timing of the big hit is the high base state. That is, in the second time-saving state, if a big hit is achieved by passing through the specific area via the special figure 2 small hits A to special figure 2 small hits D, it is determined that the big hit is made in the high base state. be done. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is the case where it passes through the specific area via the special figure 2 small hit A to the special figure 2 small hit D in the normal state and the first time saving state and becomes a big hit. A different and advantageous game state (second time saving state) is set (see FIGS. 6A to 6C).

In this way, when the game state once shifts to the second time saving state, even if the big win is achieved via a small win or even if the big win is a direct hit, the game state after the big win game ends is all changed to the second time saving state. have set. In addition, the second time saving state is set to a number of times (average value) of time saving times set after the jackpot game ends when a big hit is achieved via a small hit than in the first time saving state, so the time saving state (Second time-saving state) is more likely to continue (the possibility of ending the time-saving state is lower), and the player can easily obtain a large amount of game profit in a short period of time.

In addition, the first time-saving state draws attention to the state of transition to the big hit (whether it is a direct hit or a small hit V), and the second time-saving state does not change the transition state of the game state depending on the state of transition to the big hit (a direct hit However, the second time-saving state is set even for the small win V), giving a sense of security and making the player pay attention to the amount of game profit obtained. Further, as a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the playability, and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine.

Further, as another aspect of the above-described embodiment, in FIG. 6A, in the normal state, the second special symbol validity determination is executed, and when the special figure 2 jackpot A is obtained, 500 after the end of the jackpot game It shall be set to the second time saving state in which the number of time saving times is set. In the normal state, instead of such a mode, when the second special symbol propriety determination is executed and the special figure 2 jackpot A is obtained, the first time saving number of times of 90 times is set after the end of the jackpot game. It may be set to the state. In such a mode, even if the jackpot is achieved in any mode from the normal state, after the jackpot game ends, the second time saving state is not set, and the first time saving state is always passed through once. Only after that, it is possible to make the transition to the most advantageous second time saving state impossible. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's desire to capture the game and increase the interest in the game.

Here, the jackpot game performed by the occurrence of the jackpot consists of a plurality of rounds (R) opened by the first jackpot or the second jackpot. Incidentally, the time-saving state means a state in which a variable time shortening function (time-saving function) for special symbols and ordinary symbols operates as described later. In addition, in the first embodiment, when the time saving function operates, the opening extension function that extends or increases the opening time and the number of times of opening when the second start port 21 is opened is also operated. Details of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described later.

"Special figure 2 small hits A to D" are all small wins in which the number of times the second big winning hole 35 is opened and the opening time are "1 time" and "1.6 seconds". In addition, in the small winning (small winning game), the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the number of rounds but simply the number of openings. Then, "special figure 2 small hits A to D" are V After passing, the second and subsequent rounds are started (the first round is a small winning game).

Further, although details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, there is provided a random number for special symbol suitability determination that takes a value in the range of "0 to 65535" (see FIG. 7(A)), The big hit determination value in the first special symbol propriety judgment and the second special symbol propriety judgment is both "65209 to 65535", and the small hit judgment value in the second special symbol propriety judgment is "1 to 936" (Fig. 8 (A)). That is, the big hit probability is "1/about 200", and the special figure 2 small hit probability is "1/about 70". Therefore, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state) in which the second special symbol propriety determination is mainly performed, a big hit (small hit V) via a small hit occurs with a higher probability than a direct hit. It will happen. In addition, in the aspect of the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs and a small hit game is performed in the time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state), right hitting is performed according to the launch navigation performed by the game machine. If only (or as long as the launch continues), with a probability of about 99%, the game ball enters the second big winning hole during the small hit game, and the entered game ball enters the specific area. is set to pass through It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, the possibility of passing the specific area in the small winning game may be set to about 50%.

In this pachinko game machine 1, whether a big win, a small win, or a loss is determined based on "random numbers for judging special symbols (also referred to as "information for judging success" or "acquired information"). The judgment of the jackpot type in the case of becoming a small hit is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also called "random number for determining the jackpot pattern" and "information for determining the jackpot pattern"). The determination of the type is performed based on "random number for small hit type determination ("random number for small hit design determination", also referred to as "information for small hit design determination"). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for judging whether or not the special symbol takes a value in the range of "0 to 65535", the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 199", and the small hit type The decision random number takes a value in the range of "0-199". In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct, a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the small hit type. In addition, there is "fluctuation pattern random number (also called "fluctuation pattern information")".

Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of "0-198". Random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol suitability determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery). The normal symbol random number takes a value within the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states by combining the probability variation function for special symbols and normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening extension function in an operating state or a non-operating state. . Since the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment 1 is of a one-type and two-type mixed type, it does not have a probability variation function for special symbols.

The state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called "time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state)", and the state that is not working is " Non-time saving state (normal state)”. In the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the success/failure determination is performed using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 8(A). Specifically, the probability (jackpot probability) of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol propriety determination is "1/approximately 200" for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the special symbol propriety determination (small hit probability) is "0" for the first special symbol, "1/about 70" for the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is set so that there is no small hit (see FIG. 8(A)). In addition, instead of such a mode, a small hit may be provided to the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination, and a big hit may occur via the small hit.

Also, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state), the average value of the special symbol fluctuation time (time from the start of the variable display to the time of fixed display) is a special in the non-time-saving state (normal state) It is shorter than the average value of the pattern fluctuation time. That is, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state), a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected is more than a non-time-saving state (normal state) is used to determine the variation pattern (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state), the pace of digestion of special symbols is faster (the frequency of special symbols fluctuating per unit time is higher), and effective entry to the starting port Balls (entered balls that can be stored as special figure reservations) are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the time saving state, there are a plurality of time saving states of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, and the variation of the special symbol in the second time saving state which is an advantageous game state for the player. The average value of the time (the time from the start of the variable display to the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variable time of the special symbols in the first time saving state.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for normal symbols are operated in synchronization with the variation time shortening function (first time saving state or second time saving state) of the special pattern (second special pattern). That is, the normal symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function operate in the special symbol time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state) and do not operate in the non-time saving state (normal state). Therefore, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state), the hit probability in normal symbol propriety determination is higher than the non-time-saving state (normal state). That is, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol per determination table used in the non-time saving state, using the normal symbol per determination table, normal symbol success determination (normal symbol determination) (See FIG. 8(E)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the variable display of the normal symbols will result in a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

Further, in the time saving state (the first time saving state or the second time saving state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the non-working time saving state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8(F)). Furthermore, in the time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state), the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of opening times of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is higher than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening frequency increasing function of the variable winning device 22 is in operation. Specifically, in a non-time-saving state, when the result of the normal symbol propriety determination is hit, the opening and closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.2 seconds once, and the second start port is in an open state during that period. becomes. Also, in the time-saving state (first time-saving state or second time-saving state), when the result of the normal symbol propriety determination is hit, the opening and closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 2.0 seconds three times. be done. Note that the opening time extension function and the opening number increasing function may be collectively referred to simply as the "opening extension function".

In the situation where the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the open extension function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, if these functions are not operating ("low frequency state" or "predetermined The second starting port 21 is opened more frequently, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Accordingly, the state in which these functions are activated is referred to as the "high base state" and the state in which they are not activated is referred to as the "low base state." In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

In this embodiment, in the high base state, all of the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variable time reduction function, and the opening extension function of the variable winning device 22 are functioning, but in the high base state (high frequency state), Not all of the above functions need work. That is, by operating at least one of the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, than when the function is not in operation It is sufficient if the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In addition, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). Therefore, this game state is also referred to as a "time saving high base state". As described above, the time saving high base state has different end conditions depending on the time saving state (whether the first time saving state or the second time saving state). When the termination condition is established, the game state is set to the normal state, which is the non-time-saving state and the low-base state. This game state is also referred to as "non-time-saving low base state". In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state (initial state) after the power is turned on is a non-time-saving low base state (normal state).

In the high base state, making the game ball enter the right game area (right side area) 3B by hitting it to the right can progress the game more advantageously than making the game ball enter the left game area 3A by hitting it to the left. The second starting port is arranged at a position where a game ball launched into the right game area can enter and a game ball launched into the left game area cannot enter (or is difficult to enter). It should be noted that the gate 28 is also arranged at a position where a game ball launched into the right game area can enter. In addition, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is more likely to be opened than in the low base state. The ball is more likely to enter the starting hole (second starting hole) by shooting the game ball and aiming at the second starting hole 21 . Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol propriety determination, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the second start port 21. - 特許庁As a result, in the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to obtain a large number of start-up balls (opportunities for judging the suitability of special symbols) by hitting right rather than hitting left. In this state (high base state), the firing direction indicator 47 (also referred to as "first firing notification means") whose display is controlled by the main control unit 80 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner, and is fired to the right game area. It is assumed to inform what should be done. Further, in this embodiment, since the game is played by hitting to the right even in the big win game and the small win game, the shooting direction indicator 47 informs that the ball should be shot to the right game area.

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to enter the game ball into the left game area (left side area) 3A by hitting to the left than to advance the game by hitting to the right. The first starting port is arranged at a position where a game ball launched into the left game area can enter. In addition, the game ball launched to the right game area may be placed in the first starting port so as not to be able to enter, or may be placed so as to be able to enter. In the case of arranging so that a ball can be entered, shooting a game ball to the left game area increases the possibility of a game ball entering the first start hole rather than shooting a game ball to the right game area. shall be In addition, in the low base state, it is more difficult to open the second start port 21 than in the high base state. The ball is more likely to enter the starting hole if the ball is shot into the area and aimed to enter the first starting hole 20 . As a result, in the low base state, hitting left to enter the game ball into the first starting port 20 can obtain more starting balls (opportunities for judging the suitability of special symbols) than hitting right. can be used, which is advantageous to the player. In this state (low base state), the shooting direction indicator 47 whose display is controlled by the main control unit 80 is lighting-controlled (display controlled) in a predetermined manner different from that in the high base state, and the ball is shot to the left game area. It is assumed to inform what should be done.

Specifically, the shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two "yz" LEDs, and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: lights off, ▪: lights on). can. Also, during the execution of the high base state and the winning game, it should be fired to the right game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit, such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can be notified.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. FIG. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, various flags, status and counter resets. etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In addition, in the present embodiment 1 and the drawings, the normal symbol is "general figure", the special symbol is "special figure", the first special symbol is "special figure 1", "first special figure", and the second special symbol is "special figure". Figure 2" is sometimes referred to as the "second special figure".

After the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 .

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed, for example, based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a 4 ms cycle. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), the output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands to be output here include the game state, the results of the special symbol success/failure determination, the symbols (big win symbols, small win symbols) as the winning type, and the information related to the variation pattern and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first big winning sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 30a, second big winning hole sensor 35a, general ball entrance sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) is read and stored in the output buffer of RAM as winning ball information. A detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

The normal design/special design main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the later-described starting opening sensor detection process (S204), normal figure operation process (S205), special figure operation process (S206), reserved ball number process (S207) and Power off monitoring processing (S208) is executed. Thereafter, other processing (S209) not deeply related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) ends. Then, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10). ), and the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). . If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal pattern reserved balls (the number of normal pattern reservations, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not it is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal design reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal design reserved balls (S303), and normal design random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquisition random value (acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal design reservation balls out of the normal design reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting hole 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S305). When the game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but when the game ball enters the second start port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of pending balls (the number of second special pending, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of second special pending provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not there is (S306). Then, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), proceed to S309, but if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of held balls in FIG. 2 (S307).

Then special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S308) it does. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the jackpot type Counter value (label-TRND-AS), small hit type determination random number counter value (label-TRND-KS), reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label- TRND-T1) is acquired (that is, the random number value shown in FIG. 7 (A) is acquired), and the acquired random value (acquired information) is the current special figure 2 pending ball number out of the second special figure pending storage unit Store in the address space according to

Subsequently, in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a (S309). ). When the game ball has not entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process is finished, but when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of the first special figure reservations, specifically the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not there is (S310). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process is finished, but if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S311).

Then special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S312) it does. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), value of random number counter for determining jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), value of random number counter for determining small hit type (label-TRND-KS), value of reach random number counter (label-TRND -RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label -TRND-T1) (that is, obtain the random value shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and store the obtained random value in the first special figure reservation storage unit It is stored in the address space according to the current Toku-zu 1 reserved ball number.

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). In the general pattern operation process (S205), the processing related to the normal pattern display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform normal design fluctuation process (S404), and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401 and S403, YES in S405), normal design confirmation Processing (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal design standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and if "0" (YES in S501) Finish this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol propriety determination process, which will be described later, is performed (S502). Also, following the normal design propriety determination process (S502), the normal design variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (F) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the game state is a non-time-saving state, a normal design variation pattern in which the normal design variation time is 30 seconds is selected. Also, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, a normal symbol random number shift process (S504), which will be described later, is performed. Also, following the normal design random number shift process (S504), the normal design fluctuation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503 is used to start the normal symbol variation display, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol variation start.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the game state is the time saving state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, the time saving state (YES in S602), the table for the time saving state out of the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (E) (hit determination value is " 0” to “239”), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for judging normal symbol validity (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit judgment values. On the other hand, in S602, if the time saving flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is in a non-time saving state (NO in S602), the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. Based on the judgment value "0", "1"), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605.

Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong judgment (S603, S604) is to determine whether it is a hit (per general figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is normal The pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608) , terminate the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
After the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the normal pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal design fluctuation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the general pattern operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal design with the display result (hit normal design or losing normal design) according to the judgment result of the random number for normal design propriety determination (S804), this processing finish.

[Normal design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal design determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern per flag is ON (S901). If the normal pattern hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether it is in the time saving state (S902). And if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). The opening pattern in the time saving state is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port open counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-saving state (NO in S902), the open pattern during the non-time-saving state is set as the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S906). The open pattern in the non-time saving state is, as described above, an open pattern that opens once for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, "1" is set to the second starting port open counter. Then, following the setting of the open pattern (S903, S906), the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in normal electric accessary product processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the normal pattern per end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has arrived (S1003). If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has come (S1005), if it has not reached (NO at S1005), the process is finished, and if it has reached (YES at S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and whether or not the value of the second starting port open counter is "0" is determined. Judge (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES at S1008), end processing for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and an end flag for normal pattern is set (S1010) to end the process. In addition, the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time saving state, and if it is during the non-time saving state When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the normal pattern per end flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 of the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so per normal pattern The end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal pattern per flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure action processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure operation processing (S206) following normal figure operation processing (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the processing related to the special symbol indicator 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, when the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101 NO in S1103, YES in S1103), perform special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104), and if "special figure operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol confirmed When the processing (S1106) is performed and the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103 and S1105, YES in S1107), special electric auditors processing 1 as a jackpot game (S1108) , and when the "special figure operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107 are all NO), a special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) as a small winning game is performed. It should be noted that the special figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) of the second starting port 21 is "0" (S1201). . If the number of special figures 2 reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the second start port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1206). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first start port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the process of setting the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as a standby screen (executing a demo screen for customer waiting) is in progress (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process ends, Otherwise (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more stored random number counter values acquired based on the ball entering the second start port 21 , Toku-zu 2 propriety determination processing (S1202), Toku-zu 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1203), Toku-zu 2 random number shift processing (S1204), Toku-zu 2 variation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20, special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1207) described later, special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. Thus, in this embodiment 1, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when the second special figure reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). And in the present embodiment 1, the win/loss determination based on the second special figure reservation is more likely to result in a big hit with a large profit for the player than the win/loss determination based on the first special figure reservation (Fig. 8 (B )).

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM (that is, the first of the second special figure reservation (S1302). Next, a win/fail decision is made based on the hit decision table shown in FIG. 8(A) (S1303). In this hit determination table, the big hit determination value in the special figure 1 success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) and the special figure 2 success/failure determination (second special symbol success/failure determination) is set to "65209 to 65535" ( Jackpot probability: 1/about 200). In addition, the special figure 2 small hit judgment value in the special figure 2 propriety judgment (second special symbol propriety judgment) is set to "1 to 936".

Next, in S1304, it is determined whether the result of the success/failure determination (second special symbol success/failure determination) is a big hit (S1304), and if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination (S1303) is a "big hit" (YES in S1304) , read the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS), determine the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. A big hit pattern is determined based on the value (S1311), a big hit flag is turned on (S1312), and the process is finished.

In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Also, the determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the game state (current game state) when the determination is performed. That is, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON, whether the first time saving state flag is ON, whether the second time saving state flag is ON, and if the time saving flag is not ON A jackpot type is determined using a state jackpot type determination table. Also, if the time saving flag is ON, it is determined whether it is the first time saving state or the second time saving state, and if it is the first time saving state, the big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table for the first time saving state, and the second time saving state is determined. If it is in the two-hour short state, the big-hit type is determined using the big-hit type determination table for the second time-short state.

On the other hand, in S1304, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination (S1303) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1304), it is then determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). Here, in the case of the validity judgment related to the second special symbol, the value of the special symbol validity judgment random number counter (label-TRND-A) is the small hit judgment value of the special figure 2 "1 to 936" It is determined whether or not they match (see FIG. 8A). Then, in S1305, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is not a "small hit" (NO in S1305), the off pattern is determined (S1309), and the process ends. That is, if the result of the success/failure determination (S1303) is neither a "big hit" nor a "minor hit" (NO in S1304, NO in S1305), the result is "loss".

On the other hand, in S1305, if it is determined that the result of the small hit judgment (S1305) (result of the judgment) is "small hit" (YES in S1305), the value of the random number counter for determining the small hit type (label -TRND- KS) is read, the small hit type is determined based on the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. S1307), turn on the small hit flag (S1308), and finish the process. In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the small hit type is determined using the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol. Also, the determination of the small hit type is performed based on the game state (current game state) when performing the determination. That is, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON, whether the first time saving state flag is ON, whether the second time saving state flag is ON, and if the time saving flag is ON, non-time saving A small hit type is determined using a small hit type determination table for the state, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is determined whether it is the first time saving state or the second time saving state, and if it is the first time saving state, the first time saving state. The small hit type is determined using the small hit type determination table for the second time saving state, and the small hit type is determined using the small hit type determination table for the second time saving state if it is in the second time saving state. In addition, in S1308, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit type determined in S1306 (determination result of S1306) is turned ON.

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) next to the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) first determines whether the gaming state is a non-time-saving state (normal state) (whether the time-saving flag is ON) (S1401 ). Then, in S1401, when it is determined that it is in a non-time-saving state (normal state) (YES in S1401), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402). In S1402, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1402), the table for the second special symbol non-time saving state medium jackpot (the second special symbol among the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. ), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403), and proceed to the process of S1404. In this process, the variation pattern P9 is selected. In addition, during the non-time-saving state, in principle, the variation display of the second special symbol is not scheduled (the possibility of it being performed is also low), so the number of variation patterns is set to be less than that of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in S1402, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is then determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, in S1405, when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the second special symbol non-time-saving state medium-small hit table (out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the second special symbol and non-time-saving state and the portion corresponding to the small hit), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1407), and proceed to the processing of S1404. . Specifically, the variation pattern P10 is selected in the first embodiment.

Also, in S1405, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), the second special symbol non-time-saving state out of the table (the second special symbol and non-time-saving state of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 And the part corresponding to the deviation) is referred to, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1404. Specifically, the variation pattern P11 is selected in the first embodiment.

Also, in S1401, the game state is not a non-time saving state, that is, if it is determined that it is a time saving state (NO in S1401), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (S1408). At S1408, when it is determined that the time saving state is the first time saving state (YES at S1408), it is then determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1409). In S1409, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1409), the second special symbol first time short state medium jackpot table (the second special symbol and first time short state of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 And the part corresponding to the big hit), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1410), and proceed to the processing of S1404. In this process, one of the variation patterns P14, P15, P16 is selected. In addition, during the time saving state, in principle, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, so the types of variation patterns are set more for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in S1409, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1409), it is then determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1411). Then, in S1411, when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1411), the second special symbol first time short state medium and small hit table (the second special symbol and the second out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) 1 time-saving state and the part corresponding to the small hit), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1413), and proceed to the processing of S1404. Specifically, in the first embodiment, one of the variation patterns P17, 18, and 19 is selected.

Also, in S1411, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1411), the second special symbol first time short state out of the table (out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the second special symbol and the first Part corresponding to time saving state and off), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1412), and proceed to the process of S1404. Specifically, in the first embodiment, one of the variation patterns P20-24 is selected. In the case of loss, when the selected variation pattern is P20 to P22, the loss ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect, so a relatively long variation time is set. Also, in the case of deviation, when the variation pattern is not selected from P20 to P22, P23 is selected if the number of reservations at the time of selection of the variation pattern is 0 or 1, and P24 if the number of reservations is 2 or 3 is selected.

On the other hand, in S1408, if it is determined that the time saving state is not the first time saving state, that is, it is the second time saving state (NO in S1408), then it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1414). In S1414, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1414), the table for the second special symbol second time short state medium jackpot (the second special symbol and second time short state of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) And the part corresponding to the big hit), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1415), and proceed to the processing of S1404. In this process, one of the variation patterns P27, 28, 29 is selected.

On the other hand, in S1414, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1414), it is then determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1416). Then, in S1416, when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1416), the second special symbol second time-saving state medium and small hit table (the second special symbol and the second of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) 2 o'clock state and the part corresponding to the small hit), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1418), and proceed to the processing of S1404. Specifically, in the first embodiment, one of the variation patterns P30, 31, and 32 is selected.

Also, in S1416, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1416), the second special symbol second time short state middle out table (out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the second special symbol and the second Part corresponding to time saving state and off), select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1417), and proceed to the process of S1404. Specifically, in the first embodiment, one of the variation patterns P33 to P37 is selected. In addition, in the case of loss, when the selected variation pattern is P33 to P35, the loss ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect, so a relatively long variation time is set. Also, in the case of deviation, when the variation pattern is not selected from P33 to P35, P36 is selected if the number of reservations when selecting the variation pattern is 0 or 1, and if the number of reservations is 2 or 3, P37 is selected.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 23 is performed and this processing ends. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit is one lower side (for example, if the second special figure reservation storage unit consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003", the address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit, that is, (if stored up to the upper limit number) RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 21 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" and the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) , Special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1207), Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), Special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), Special figure 1 variation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), the process (S1602 to S1608) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the special figure 1, in S1602, it is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) The random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is read, and judgment is made based on the hit judgment table shown in FIG. 8(A) (S1603). In addition, as a result of the validity determination (S1603) of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it differs from the special figure 2 validity determination process in that it does not have a small hit.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this processing is omitted.

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM area corresponding to the fourth of the first special figure reservation is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, the special symbol variation time (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has passed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not passed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Next, in S1903, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (S1903), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1903), the value of the time saving counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and the processing of S1905 transition to In S1905, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter has become "0" (S1905), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter has become "0" (YES in S1905), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1906) , the first time saving state flag is turned OFF (S1907), the second time state flag is turned OFF (S1908), and the process proceeds to S1909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1903 that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1903), and if it is determined in S1905 that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1909. . In S1909, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1909), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is determined according to the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the small hit type determination random number. Other processing such as stop display is performed according to the result (S1910), and the processing ends.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the round counter for counting the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game is set based on the jackpot flag that is ON, and the first big prize is won. The number of times the mouth 30 is opened per round and the opening time (see FIG. 6) are set (S2002). As described above, in the first embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the special figure 1 jackpot is "5R", and the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 jackpot is either "5R" or "10R". Therefore, in S2002, either "5" or "10" is set as the value of the round counter, and "1 time" or "25 seconds" is set as the number of openings per round and the opening time of the first big winning opening 30. set.

After completing the processing of S2002, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (S2003), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started (S2004), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2005). ).

Also, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON in S2001 (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2006). If the small-hit flag is ON (YES in S2006), the value of the small-hit open counter for counting the number of openings of the big-hit opening (second big-hit opening 35) during the small-hit game is set, and the second The opening time (see FIG. 6) of the big winning opening 35 is set (S2007). As described above, in the first embodiment, the number of opening times and the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the small winning game are "1 time" and "1.6 seconds", so in S2007, opening for small winning "1" is set as the counter value, and "1.6 seconds" is set as the open time.

After completing the processing of S2007, in order to start the small winning game, set the opening command of the small winning game (S2008), start the opening production of the small winning game (S2009), and set the special figure operation status to "5". Set (S2010) and finish the process. On the other hand, in S2006, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2006), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2011) and the process is finished. .

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric auditors processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving The flag is turned OFF (S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game is controlled to a non-time-saving state (low base state). In the present embodiment 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is also controlled to the low base state during execution of the jackpot game. Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all of the jackpots (first jackpot or second jackpot) have been opened (jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

At S2105, if it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO at S2105), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening is open (S2106). In S2106, if it is determined that the big winning mouth is not open (NO in S2106), whether or not the time (timing) to open the big winning mouth has come, that is, the first round after the opening time of the big win has passed or whether or not it is time to start the next round (next opening) after the time interval between rounds has elapsed (S2107). If it is determined in S2107 that it is not the time to start the round (NO in S2107), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2107 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2107), the first big prize is opened in accordance with the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the type of big win. The device 31 is activated (S2110), and the process ends.

In S2106, if it is determined that the large winning opening is open (YES in S2106), the number of balls entering the large winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (10 per round in this embodiment 1). ) is reached (S2111). In S2111, if it is determined that the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not the time (timing) to close the big winning opening has come, that is, after opening the big winning opening (See FIG. 6, 25 seconds) has passed (S2112). When it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not reached the specified time (NO in S2112), the process is finished.

On the other hand, in S2111, if it is determined that the specified number of balls has been entered (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the first big winning hole 30 has reached the specified time (in S2112 YES), that is, when it is determined that either of the two round end conditions is met, the large winning opening that was open is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

On the other hand, in S2115, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116), and a jackpot ending is performed. A production is started (S2117). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process ends. If the big win is a 10R jackpot, the round counter becomes "0" when the big win hole is opened 10 times. becomes "0". In addition, as described above, in the case of a jackpot game via a jackpot, opening in a jackpot game is regarded as execution of one round, so in the case of a 5R jackpot, one time opening in a jackpot game (considered as one round) , and control processing is performed so that the remaining 4 rounds are released in the jackpot game.

Also, in S2105, if it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether the execution time (ending time) of the jackpot ending effect has passed. is determined (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2119, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), and the later-described game state setting process (S2121) is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (FIG. 20).

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric accessary product processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the first time saving state flag indicating that the game state is the first time saving state is ON (S2230). This is, if the game state when the small hit is the first time saving state, before opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening) by the small winning game, the time saving flag is turned OFF, and the game state is changed. This is for transitioning to the low base state. In addition, in the present embodiment, along with the start processing of the small winning game, it is determined whether or not the first time saving state, and the processing of turning off the time saving flag is performed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the timing for determining whether or not the game state is the first time-saving state when the small hit is achieved may be performed within the processing of the second special symbol success/failure determination. That is, when the small hit is in the first time-saving state, the time-saving flag is turned off if the time-saving flag can be reliably turned off before the big winning opening is opened by the small-hit game. Any time is fine. Although these are different in the timing to turn off the time saving flag, the game state is changed to the time saving state (high base state, the first time-saving state) to the normal state (low base state).

In S2230, the first time saving state flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that a small hit in the first time saving state has occurred (YES in S2230), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2231), and the process proceeds to S2201. . As a result, subsequent small winning games are executed in the low base state. On the other hand, in S2230, when it is determined that the first time saving state flag is not ON (NO in S2230), the process proceeds to S2201 as it is. Thereby, when the time saving flag is ON in the second time saving state, the small winning game is executed while the time saving flag is ON in the high base state. In addition, even when a small win occurs in the low base state with the time saving flag OFF, the small winning game is executed in the low base state with the time saving flag OFF.

In S2201, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2201). The small-hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning opening 35 has ended in the small-hit game. If it is determined in S2201 that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening 35 is open (S2202). When it is determined in S2202 that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2202), whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second big winning opening 35 has arrived, that is, the opening time of the small winning has passed. It is then determined whether the time has come to start the first opening, or whether the time has come to start the next opening after the time interval between multiple times of opening has elapsed (S2203).

If it is determined in S2203 that it is not the time to open the big winning slot (NO in S2203), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that it is time to open the big winning hole (YES in S2203), the second big winning device 36 opens the second big winning hole 35 according to the small winning opening pattern (see FIG. 6). is operated (S2204), and in order to open the specific area 39 provided in the second prize winning device 36, the movable piece (not shown) is started to operate according to a predetermined operation pattern (S2205), and further , set the V effective period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is effective (S2206), and finish the process. Determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid means turning on the big hit flag based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a. Determining that the detection is invalid means that the jackpot flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 in the small winning game is set to the number of times of opening "1 time" and the opening time of "1.6 seconds". In addition, in the first embodiment, the operation pattern of the movable piece is such that the specific area 39 is opened for "0.75 seconds" as the opening of the second big prize opening 35 is started, and then closed for "0.1 seconds". After this state, the state is changed to the open state again for “0.75 seconds”, and the specific area 39 is set to the closed state in accordance with the closing of the second big winning hole 35 . Furthermore, in the present embodiment 1, during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 in the small winning game and after closing the second large winning opening 35 (after the end of opening the second large winning opening 35 in the small winning game) Seconds shall be set as the V validity period. The reason why the V valid period is set not only during the opening of the second large prize-winning port 35 but also for several seconds after the closing of the second large prize-winning port 35 is that, for example, the second This is in consideration of the possibility that the game ball entering the big winning hole 35 may be detected by the specific area sensor 39a (pass through the specific area 39) after the second big winning hole 35 is closed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles such as a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 not becoming a big hit even though the game ball passed through the specific area 39 legally. In the first embodiment, the V effective period is set to "2.6 seconds", and in addition to the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the small winning game "1.6 seconds", after closing the second large winning opening 35 "1 second" determines that detection of game balls by the specific area sensor 39a is effective.

In S2202, if it is determined that the second big winning hole 35 is open (YES in S2202), then the number of balls entering the second big winning hole 35 is the specified maximum number of balls (in the first embodiment, 10) is reached (S2207). In S2207, if it is determined that the specified number of balls has not been entered is cheers (NO in S2207), then it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second large prize winning port 35, that is, the second large prize winning port 35 is opened. After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has passed (S2208). Then, in S2208, when it is determined that the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 has not elapsed (NO in S2208), the process proceeds to S2211.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2207 that the number of balls entering the second large prize-winning port 35 has reached the specified number of balls entering (YES in S2207), or the second large prize-winning port 35 is opened in S2208. When it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in S2208), the second big winning opening 35 is closed (S2209), the value of the open counter for small wins is decremented by 1 (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, since the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game is set to "1 time" and "1.6 seconds" for the opening time, the second big winning hole 35 It is practically impossible to enter 10 game balls. For this reason, there is almost no possibility that the processing of S2207 will result in an affirmative determination.

Next, in S2211, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39) (S2211). In S2211, if it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor (YES in S2211), proceed to the processing after S2220 shown in FIG. 34, and if it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2211), It is determined whether or not the value of the open counter is "0" (S2212). In S2212, when it is determined that the value of the open counter for the small hit is not "0" (NO in S2212), the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in S2212, when it is determined that the value of the open counter for small hits is "0" (YES in S2212), the process proceeds to small hit end processing in S2213. In S2213, as a small-hit ending process for ending the small-hit game, a small-hit ending command is set, and a small-hit ending effect is started (S2214). Then, the small hit end flag is turned ON (S2315), and the process is finished. In the present embodiment 1, the opening counter for small win becomes "0" when the second big winning opening 35 is opened once.

In S2201, if it is determined that the small hit end flag is ON, that is, the small hit game is executed and the game ball has not passed through the specific area (YES in S2201), the second big winning opening 35 Since the opening is over, it is determined whether or not the time for the ending of the small hit has passed (S2216), and if it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2216), the process is finished. On the other hand, in S2216, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2216), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2217), the small hit flag is turned OFF (S2218), and the process proceeds to S2232. In S2232, it determines whether the 1st time saving state flag is ON (S2232), and when it determines with a 1st time saving state flag not being ON (it is NO at S2232), it transfers to the process of S2219. Also, in S2232, when it is determined that the first time saving state flag is ON (YES in S2232), the first time saving state flag is turned OFF (S2233), and the process proceeds to S2219. In S2219, set the special figure operation status to "1" (S2219) and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (FIG. 20).

It should be noted that, when the small winning is achieved in the second game state, the time saving flag is not switched from ON to OFF at the start of the small winning game. Also, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 35) is not performed. That is, when a small win occurs in the first time saving state or normal state, the game state is not changed before and after the execution of the small win game. On the other hand, when a small win occurs in the second time saving state, the game state is changed before and after the execution of the small win game. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state and enhance the game interest.

In S2211, if it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (YES in S2211), processing for generating a big hit via the small hit V, that is, ending the small winning game and starting the big winning game process to make it work. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period (S2220). Then, in S2220, when it is determined that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is during the V valid period (YES in S2220), the small hit flag is turned OFF (S2221), the big hit flag is turned ON (S2222), A V pass command is set (S2223). Here, in the present embodiment 1, as described above, the small hit flag is provided corresponding to each small hit type. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6C, the types of big hits (5R big hit, 10R big hit) via the small hit V are determined according to the small hit type.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as the big hit flags, the special figure 1 big hit flag A corresponding to the special figure 1 big hit A, the special figure 1 big hit flag B corresponding to the special figure 1 big hit B, and the special figure 1 big hit C correspond to It has a special figure 1 big hit flag C and a special figure 2 big hit flag A corresponding to the special figure 2 big hit A. As a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit A flag corresponding to the special figure 2 small hit A, a special figure 2 small hit B flag corresponding to the special figure 2 small hit B, a special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 small hit C It has a special figure 2 small hit D flag corresponding to a special figure 2 small hit C flag and a special figure 2 small hit D. In addition, as a big hit flag set when a big hit is achieved via a small hit V, a big hit flag via a special 2 small hit A corresponding to a big hit via a special 2 small hit A and a big hit via a special 2 small hit B are set. Corresponding special figure 2 small hit B via big hit flag, special figure 2 small hit C via big hit corresponding to special figure 2 small hit C big hit flag, special figure 2 small hit D corresponding to special figure 2 small hit D via big hit It has a via jackpot flag.

From this, in S2222, the small hit flag to be turned OFF in S2221, that is, based on the small hit type of the small hit flag turned ON in S1308 or S1608, the corresponding small hit via V big hit type big hit Flag (special figure 2 small hit A via big hit flag, special figure 2 small hit B via big hit flag, special figure 2 small hit C via big hit flag, special figure 2 small hit D via big hit flag) turn ON ( S2222).

At S2224, based on the jackpot flag turned ON at S2222, the value of the round counter for counting the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game is set, and the number of openings per round of the first prize winning port 30 and the number of openings are performed. Set the time (see FIG. 6) (S2224). In the present embodiment 1, as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6C, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot via the jackpot V is either "5R" or "10R", so in S2224, As the value of the round counter, either "4" or "9" is set by subtracting the number of openings performed in the small winning game, and "1 time" is set as the number of openings per round and the opening time of the second big winning opening ' and '25 seconds'.

After completing the processing of S2224, in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2225), start the opening effect of the jackpot game (S2226), and set the special figure operation status to "4" ( S2227). It should be noted that this opening command is a command that can be specified as an opening command related to a big hit game executed by the fact that the game ball has passed V based on the small hit game (also referred to as "small hit V") is possible.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2220 that the specific area sensor detected the game ball was not during the V valid period (NO in S2220), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a this time is not valid and is illegal. Since there is a possibility of , error processing is performed without generating a big hit via a small hit V (S2227), and the process is finished as it is. As error processing, an abnormal state notification indicating that a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a when it is not during the V valid period, or when a ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 It is possible to exemplify the processing of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the processing related to special symbol fluctuations such as acquisition of various random numbers based on and special symbol propriety determination. In addition, the notification of an abnormal state due to the execution of error processing, the temporary suspension of the game progress, etc., may be canceled when a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied. I can give an example.

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, when a big hit (when it is determined as a big hit in the special symbol success/failure determination, the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game It is determined whether the game state was the time saving state (whether the time saving flag was ON or OFF, whether it was the high base state or the low base state) (S2301). For example, by determining whether the second time saving state flag is ON, whether the first time saving state flag is ON, and by determining the type of the big hit flag, when the game state is a time saving state It is possible to determine whether the This is because, even if the jackpot type is the same, the game state after the jackpot game ends is different depending on the jackpot type related to the jackpot game executed this time and the game state at the time of the jackpot. ) can be set.

For example, in determining whether or not the game state at the time of the big hit is the time saving state, if it is determined that the second time saving state flag is ON, the time saving at the time of the big hit is any big hit. It can be determined that the state is a time saving state. Also, when it is determined that the first time saving state flag is ON, if the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit (big hit direct hit), the time saving state at the time of the big hit is a time saving state. I can judge. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit via the small hit V, it can be determined that the time saving state at the time of the big win is not the time saving state. Also, when both the first time saving state flag and the second time saving state flag are OFF, it can be determined that the game state when a big hit is not the time saving state (normal state) regardless of the jackpot.

In S2301, the time saving state at the time of the big hit is not the time saving state, that is, if it is determined that the game state when the big hit is a low base state (NO in S2301), then the big hit by passing through the specific area, That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit via a small hit (S2302). In S2302, if it is determined that it is not a big hit due to passing through the specific area, that is, the result of the special symbol right or wrong determination is a big hit (big hit direct hit) (NO in S2302), the big hit type determines whether it is a special figure 2 big hit A ( S2303). In S2303, if it is determined that the jackpot type is a special figure 2 jackpot A (YES in S2303), set "500" to the time saving counter (S2304), and determine whether the first time saving state flag is ON (S2324 ), when it is determined that the first time saving state flag is ON (YES in S2324), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2305), the second time saving state flag is turned ON (S2306), and the process ends. In S2324, when it determines with the 1st time saving state flag not being ON (it is NO at S2324), it transfers to the process of S2305. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the second time saving state.

In S2303, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not a special figure 2 jackpot A, that is, it is one of the special figure 1 jackpots A to C (NO in S2303), the time saving counter is set to "90" or "50" depending on the jackpot type ” or “5” is set (S2307), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2308), the first time saving state flag is turned ON (S2309), and the process ends. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the first time saving state.

In S2302, it is determined that the big hit is caused by passing through the specific area, that is, the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit and the big hit is generated by passing through the specific area during the small winning game (via small winning V). If (YES in S2302), set "90" or "50" to the time saving counter depending on the small hit type (big hit type) (S2310), turn on the time saving flag (S2311), turn on the first time saving state flag (S2312), and the process ends. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the first time saving state.

In S2301, if it is determined that the time-saving state at the time of the big hit is the time-saving state, that is, the game state when the big hit is the high base state (YES in S2301), then the big hit has been achieved by passing through the specific area , that is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit via a small hit (S2313). In S2313, if it is determined that it is not a big hit due to passing through the specific area, that is, the result of the special symbol right or wrong judgment is a big hit (big hit direct hit) (NO in S2313), the big hit type determines whether it is a special figure 2 big hit A ( S2314). In S2314, if it is determined that the jackpot type is special figure 2 jackpot A (YES in S2314), set "500" to the time saving counter (S2315), and determine whether the first time saving state flag is ON (S2326 ), when it is determined that the first time saving state flag is ON (YES in S2326), the first time saving state flag is turned OFF (S2327), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2316), and the second time saving state flag is turned ON (S2306), the process ends. In S2326, when it determines with the 1st time saving state flag not being ON (it is NO at S2326), it transfers to the process of S2316. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the second time saving state.

In S2314, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the special figure 2 jackpot A, that is, it is any of the special figure 1 jackpots A to C (NO in S2314), the time saving counter "90 (S2318), turn on the time saving flag (S2319), turn on the second time saving state flag (S2320), and finish the process. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the second time saving state. In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs in a high base state, when the big hit type is a special figure 2 big hit A, the time saving counter is set to "500", and when it is a special figure 1 big hit A to C, the time saving counter is set. is set to "90". Changing to such a mode, when the big hit is made in the high base state, even if the big hit type is the special figure 2 big hit A or the special figure 1 big hit A to C, "500" is displayed on the time saving counter. may be set. That is, when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big win in the high base state, all the games may be shifted to the second time saving state most advantageous to the player (the duration of the time saving state is long). As a result, the player can play the game with a sense of security.

At S2313, it is determined that the big hit is caused by passing through the specific area, that is, the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit and the big hit is generated by passing through the specific area during the small win game (Via small hit V). If (YES in S2313), set "90" to the time saving counter regardless of the small hit type (big hit type) (S2310), turn on the time saving flag (S2311), turn on the second time saving state flag (S2312), and the process ends. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the second time saving state. As a result, when a big hit is achieved via a small hit in the second time saving state, the set period (average value) of the time saving state becomes longer than the first time saving state, and after that the second time saving state is entered, and the game is played. Players can aim to obtain a large amount of game profit with a sense of security, and can increase their interest in the game.

The value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is variably displayed, and when the value of the counter becomes "0", the game state changes from the high base state to the low base state.

[Processing of number of pending balls]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball number process (S207) next to the special figure operation process (S206). In the reserved ball number processing (S207), first, as shown in FIG. S2501). Then, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the information of the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502).

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the power interruption monitoring process (S208) following the pending ball number process (S207). In the power-off monitoring process (S208), as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 45. FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control section). When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. . As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO at S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is not initialized, and the process proceeds to S4004. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that these S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . Incidentally, the random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the effect for determining the effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol for determining the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . In the first embodiment, as the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect, there are a random number for determining a conversation notice, a random number for determining a step-up notice, a random number for determining a pseudo-fluctuation notice, a random number for deciding a notice of moving parts, and a random number for deciding a prior notice effect. The advance notice effect to be executed is determined using the obtained value of the notice effect determination random number and each notice decision table (not shown).

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100 , sound control board 106 and lamp control board 107 . Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various production devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command to perform various Production (production pattern game production, special game production accompanying the big win game and small win game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not there is an input (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined at S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES at S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed (S4201). . Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed (S4202). Next, drive data output processing for creating and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 is performed (S4203). Then, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010), first, received command analysis processing, which will be described later, is performed (S4301). Then, after the end of the jackpot game, a launch notification process is performed (S4302). In the firing notification process after the end of the big hit game (S4302), when the game state after the end of the big win game is set to the low base state, it is confirmed that the second special figure reservation (second effect reservation information) exists. As a condition, it is a process for controlling (adjusting) the execution timing of the shooting notification effect suggesting that the shooting direction is returned from the right game area to the left game area, that is, changing from right hitting to left hitting.

Next, illumination control processing for creating lamp data to be output (data for controlling lighting of the board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66) and managing presentation time is performed (S4303). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed to store the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4304). Subsequently, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition processing is performed (S4305). After that, other processes such as updating the random number for effect determination are executed (S4306).

[Receive command analysis processing]
As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, in the received command analysis process (S4301), first, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the start ball command is received from the main control board 80 (main control unit) ( S4401), when it determines with having received the starting entering ball command (YES at S4401), the production start process at the time of entering the ball is performed (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4403. If it is determined in S4401 that the starting ball entering command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4403 without performing the ball entering production start process. This ball-entering effect start processing is executed when a start-ball command indicating that a ball has entered the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21) is received from the main control unit. It is a process, and by performing this process, the production suspension information that has not been consumed is stored in the production suspension storage unit (first production suspension storage unit 104 and second production suspension storage unit 105) that the sub control unit 90 has, Display control (control regarding the change in the number of displays and the display mode of the production suspension) of the production suspension (first production suspension 9a and second production suspension 9b) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or start mouth Based on the information acquired by the main control unit at the time of entering the ball, a so-called look-ahead effect (also referred to as “pre-production”) is performed.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the information indicating the acquired information acquired based on the entering ball to the first starting port 20 is sent from the main control unit 80 to the sub control unit 90 It is transmitted, and added and stored in the first effect suspension storage unit 104 of the sub-control unit 90 as undigested effect suspension information (effect information). In addition, the upper limit number of the number of pending effect information (also referred to as "first effect pending") stored in the first effect pending storage unit is the number of first special figure pending stored in the first special figure pending storage unit is the same number as (4), and the number of memories at that time is also the same. In addition, the upper limit of the number of pending effect information (also referred to as "second effect pending") stored in the second effect pending storage unit is the number of second special figure pending stored in the second special figure pending storage unit and the same number (4), and the number of memories at that time is also the same. Further, when a fluctuation start command to be described later is received, if it indicates the first special symbol, the oldest effect pending information stored in the corresponding first effect pending storage unit 104 is deleted. be. The same applies when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 .

In S4403, it is determined whether or not the variation start command is received from the main control unit (S4403), and if it is determined that the variation start command is received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing described later is performed (S4404). , the processing of S4407 is started. When it determines with not having received the fluctuation start command in S4403 (NO in S4403), it transfers to the process of S4407, without performing a fluctuation production start process. In S4407, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control unit (S4407), and if it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4407), the fluctuation production end processing described later is performed (S4408), Move to the processing of S4409. When it determines with not having received the fluctuation stop command by S4407 (it is NO by S4407), it transfers to the process of S4409, without performing a fluctuation production end process.

Subsequently, in S4409, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control unit (S4409). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (YES in S4409), an opening command reception process is performed (S4410), and S4411. to process. If it is determined in S4409 that the opening command has not been received (NO in S4409), the processing proceeds to S4411 without performing the opening command reception processing. In S4411, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control unit (S4411). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (YES in S4411), an ending command reception process is performed (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4411 that no ending command has been received (NO in S4411), the process proceeds to S4413 without performing the ending command reception process.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a V passing command (a command indicating that V has passed based on the occurrence of a small winning game) is received from the main control unit (S4413), and when it is determined that a V passing command has been received (YES in S4413), sets the V passage notification command (S4414), and proceeds to the processing of S4415. In the V passing command, the result of the special symbol propriety determination is any of the special figure 2 small hits A to D, and the game ball that entered the second big winning hole during the small hit game is V effective period This is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 from the main control board 80 that a specific area has been passed through. When the V passage notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) and the like in the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100. Then, the big win game effect is continued on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.例文帳に追加As a result, the player is notified that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 and that a big win game will be executed. On the other hand, when the V passing command cannot be received during the V effective period, characters such as "end" are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the big win game effect is performed without starting the big win game. exit. If it is determined in S4413 that the V passage command has not been received (NO in S4413), the process proceeds to S4415 without setting the V passage notification command. In S4415, other processes are executed and the process ends.

In addition, even when the game ball detects the specific area outside the V valid period, the V passing command including information that can specify that the passage is outside the V valid period may be received. As a result, based on the reception of the V passage command outside the valid period, it is possible to perform error notification using the speaker 67, the image display device 7, the frame lamp 66, the board surface lamp 5, etc. controlled by the sub-controller 90.

[Variation production start processing]
As shown in FIG. 45, in the variable effect start process (S4404), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires a effect determination random number such as a notice effect determination random number or a effect pattern determination random number. Acquisition processing (S4501) is performed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the forewarning effect are the random number for determining the conversational forewarning effect (also referred to as the "random number for determining the first foreplay effect"), the random number for determining the step-up notice (also referred to as the "random number for determining the second foreplay effect"). ), a random number for determining a character advance notice (also referred to as a "random number for determining a third notice effect"), a random number for deciding a moving part notice (also referred to as a "random number for determining a fourth notice effect"), and a number for determining a prior notice effect It has a random number ("random number for determining the fifth advance notice effect"), performs the processing of S4501 at the timing of receiving the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 80, and obtains a predetermined value (acquired information) from each random number. will be obtained. Also, in the setting process for notice effects etc. (S4506) described later, the notice effects (conversation notice, step-up notice, character notice, moving part advance notice), etc.

Next, in S4502, the variation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying a variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, the information specifying the variation pattern includes variation pattern information (P1 to P17) shown in FIG. and the pattern information specifying the winning type are included (see FIG. 8). Fluctuation pattern information, game state information, pattern information, etc. can be used also in other processes other than the fluctuation performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status has any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E.

Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect will be different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as characters, items, and background images that appear, and the effect symbol game effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when providing a plurality of game effects (announcement effects, ready-to-win effects, etc.), it may be possible to execute different game effects depending on the effect mode. In this embodiment, the production modes A, D, and E are executed when the low base state is controlled, and the production mode B is executed when the high base state is controlled. Also, the performance mode C is executed when the low base state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Therefore, the player can grasp the current game state by confirming which of the presentation modes A to C is.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7 controlled by the production control microcomputer 91, the board lamp 5, the variable production pattern for determining the variable production pattern (also called "production pattern") such as the movable decorative member 14 Set the table (S4504). Specifically, as a table for determining a variable effect pattern, although not illustrated, based on a variable pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, an effect symbol variation mode determination table for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol is provided. set. In this embodiment, different effect symbol variation mode determination tables are set depending on the game state and effect mode.

Next, in S4505, based on the variable effect pattern table set in S4504, select a variable effect pattern that conforms to the specified variable pattern and corresponds to the effect mode indicated by the referenced mode status (S4505). Further, in S4505, among the variable effect patterns, mainly the variation mode of the effect symbols displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (the mode of the effect symbol game effect) is determined. As a result, in the production pattern game production, when executing a reach production (ready production pattern game production), when executing a character production using a specific character (character production pattern game production), reach production and A case where character production is not executed (reach non-production symbol game production) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of ready-to-win effects (normal ready-to-win effect, super ready-to-win effect, etc.) and character effects are set as effect pattern variation modes. Based on the determination table, it is determined which of these effects to perform or not to perform (this is also referred to as "normal variation"). Then, it is possible to determine which of these effects is to be executed, and perform a prior notification effect that suggests in advance the occurrence of the effect to be executed.

Here, as the game effect, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed, the possibility of winning a big hit is set to be higher than when the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super ready-to-win effect is a game effect with a high jackpot reliability (possibility of winning a big hit) compared to the ready-to-win (normal reach) effect.

Next, in S4506, setting processing such as notice effect is performed. In the notice effect setting process (S4506), based on the effect determination random number acquired in S4501, it is determined which of the notice effect types the notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect pattern. In addition, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect symbol") is determined. A variation production pattern is determined by these processes (S4505 and S4506).

Next, in S4507, a remaining period effect determination process, which will be described later, is performed, an effect setting process for notifying the remaining period until the chance period is executed, and the process proceeds to S4508. Then, in S4508, set a variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect etc. based on the variable effect pattern selected in S4505 to S4507 (S4508), and end the variable effect start process.

Further, when the variable effect start command set in S4505 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 transmits a predetermined effect image from the ROM of the image control board 100. After reading out, the performance symbol game performance is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. - 特許庁

In addition, the performance symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the performance symbol game effect is, for example, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is the special figure 1 jackpot A or the special figure 1 jackpot B, odd number patterns such as "777" It is a doublet, and when the special figure 1 big hit C, it can be a doublet of an even number pattern such as "666". In the case of a small win, a predetermined chance number such as "135" or a special small win symbol such as "3*3" may be stopped and displayed. The same pattern may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when there is no reach, one of the three production patterns such as "787" is different from the other production patterns, and when there is no reach, there are three productions such as "635". At least one performance pattern among the patterns is selected from a loose pattern different from the other performance patterns. In addition, the stop display mode of the above-mentioned performance symbols is an example, and it is possible to appropriately change what to stop display as the stop performance symbols when a big hit, a small hit, or a failure occurs.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, when the result of special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit or a small hit, a game effect (big win game effect, small win game effect) executed on the display screen 7a will be explained. do. FIGS. 46(a) to (c) are the game effects when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit. In FIG. 46(a), in a predetermined game state (for example, normal state), the first special symbol validity determination is executed based on the ball entering the first starting port, and the result of the first special symbol validity determination is After a hit (jackpot (for example, special figure 1 jackpot A)) and execution of variable display of the production pattern 8 on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time, the winning production pattern with the same three digits ("777", big hit production pattern). is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, the display of the winning effect pattern is also called a winning notification effect 201 (hitting symbol combination, special notification effect).

Figure 46 (b) is a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Figure 46 (a), based on the fact that the hit notification effect 201 is executed in Figure 46 (a), jackpot game (hit game, first special game ), the player is instructed to shoot the game ball. In the normal state, the game is executed with the left hand, and in the big winning game, the small winning game, and the time saving state, the game is executed with the right hand. Therefore, based on the execution of the jackpot game, an instruction to "beat to the right" is made. Specifically, a specific character 210 is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a first firing direction notification effect 202 (special notification effect, first special notification effect) is executed on the right side of the specific character 210. be. In the first shooting direction notification effect 202, by displaying a right arrow suggesting the shooting of the game ball to the right game area and the characters "right shot" below the right arrow, the player can It suggests launching a game ball into the game area. The scene of FIG. 46(b) is continued from before the start of the big win game to immediately after the start of the big win game (until a predetermined time elapses or until a ball entering the big winning hole is detected). Also, the first shooting direction notification effect 202 indicates to the player that a winning game will be executed (started). In addition, a big hit game and a small hit game are generically called simply "hit game." Further, the specific character 210 and the first firing direction notification effect 202 may be combined to form a "special notification effect (first special notification effect)".

In addition, FIG. 46(c) is a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 46(b), and is a display mode (special game effect, big win game effect) displayed during the execution of the big win game after the start of the big win game. . On the left side of the display screen, the same specific character 210 as shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed in a display mode different from that shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, a second firing direction notification effect 203 is executed on the right side of the display screen. In the second firing direction notification effect 203, the right-handed character and the right arrow are displayed in a display mode different from the display mode displayed in FIG. 46(b). A round display portion is provided below the right-handed characters and the right arrow, and five "O"s indicating the number of rounds are displayed. This indicates that it is a 5-round jackpot game. In addition, an acquired profit display portion 205 is provided at the bottom of the display screen, and "35 points" is displayed to indicate the amount of game profit given to the player (the number of game balls paid out). .

46(b) is switched to the display mode (effect image) shown in FIG. 46(c), the display mode (effect image) shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed. It may be after a predetermined time has passed since then. In addition, after the display mode (effect image) shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed (before the start of the big win game when the main image is displayed), the big win game starts (opening of the big winning opening starts). may be switched to the display mode (effect image) shown in FIG. 46(c). Also, after the display mode (effect image) shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed, a predetermined number of game balls (may be the first ball or may be the second ball or more) are displayed in the big winning hole. The switch may be triggered by detecting that the has entered the ball. Alternatively, two or more of the above-described arbitrary conditions may be combined, and the display mode may be switched using whichever condition is satisfied earlier as a trigger. For example, when a predetermined number of game balls (may be the first ball, or may be two or more balls) are entered (detected) in the big winning hole, and the display shown in FIG. 46(b) The display mode may be switched when either one of the fact that a predetermined time has elapsed since the mode (effect image) was displayed is established.

Next, using FIGS. 46(d) to (f) and FIG. 47(g), a small hit (second result, second specific result) and a small winning game (second special game) are executed. Then, the game effect when the game ball passes through the specific area will be described. In addition, a big hit game is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area during the small hit game. Figure 46 (d), in a predetermined gaming state (for example, the first time-saving state), the second special symbol propriety determination is executed based on the ball entering the second start port, the second special symbol propriety determination of the The result is a hit (small hit (for example, special figure 2 small hit A)), and after performing the variable display of the production pattern 8 on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time, the same three-digit winning production pattern ("333", It shows a scene in which the hit effect pattern, the small hit effect pattern) are stopped and displayed. In addition, the display of the winning effect pattern is also called a winning notification effect 201 (hitting symbol combination, special notification effect).

It should be noted that it may be difficult to determine whether a small hit or a big hit has been achieved just by looking at the small hit performance pattern (for example, "333"). In addition, by stopping and displaying a common winning performance pattern (for example, "333" or "777") between the big winning performance pattern and the small winning performance pattern, just by looking at the stopped winning performance pattern, the small winning performance pattern is displayed. It may be difficult to determine whether the game has become a big hit or a big hit. In addition, different special patterns are stop-displayed for the big win pattern and the small win pattern, but the special pattern (special pattern display part) is formed in a smaller size than the performance pattern (performance pattern display part).

Fig. 46(e) is a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from Fig. 46(d) (before the start of the small-hit game), and the hit notification production 201 is executed (the small-hit production pattern is stopped and displayed) in Fig. 46(d). Based on this fact, the game ball shooting direction is indicated to the player in order to execute a small winning game (hitting game). As described above, the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed by hitting to the right. Therefore, based on the execution of the winning game (minor winning game), the instruction of "right hitting" is made. Specifically, as in FIG. 46(b), a specific character 210 is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a first firing direction notification effect 202 (special notification effect, First special notification effect) is executed. In the first shooting direction notification effect 202, a right arrow suggesting shooting of the game ball to the right game area and characters "Right shot" below the right arrow are displayed. That is, the first shooting direction notification effect (shooting direction notification effect) executed before the start of the winning game shown in FIG. It is common between the time (FIG. 46(b)) and the time of the small hit (second specific result, second result) (FIG. 46(e)). Also, the scene of FIG. 46(e) is continued from a predetermined time before the start of the small winning game until the start of the small winning game (before). Further, the specific character 210 and the first firing direction notification effect 202 may be combined to form a "special notification effect (first special notification effect)".

Moreover, FIG.46(f) is the scene after predetermined time progress from FIG.46(e), and is a display mode displayed during small-hit game execution after starting a small-hit game. In FIG. 46(f), in addition to the display mode (first shooting direction notification effect) of FIG. The progress display (subtraction display) of the remaining time 206a of the small winning game is displayed in real time. The remaining time display (additional notification effect, remaining time display effect) in the remaining time display section indicates the remaining period (remaining time) of the small hit game, and the player can see that the remaining time becomes "0" (remaining time Before the time runs out), that is, during the execution period of this small winning game (until the small winning game ends), the game ball is made to enter the second big winning hole and pass through the specific area (specific condition to be established). The display screen shown in FIG. 46(f) is in a display state in which both the special notification effect (first special notification effect) and the additional notification effect are displayed.

When the big hit production pattern is stopped and displayed (the result of the special pattern success/failure judgment is a big hit (hereinafter also referred to as "direct hit big hit")) and the winning game starts, and the small hit production pattern is stopped and displayed (special In both the case where the result of the symbol success/failure determination is a small win and the winning game is started, the winning notification performance 201 (stop display of the winning symbol combination) is executed, and then the common first shooting direction. A notification effect 202 is executed. Then, when the big hit game is started by the direct hit big hit, after executing the common first firing direction notification effect 202, the big hit round effect (Fig. 46(c)) indicating that the round game of the big win game is being executed etc.). On the other hand, when a small hit game starts with a small hit, after executing the common first firing direction notification effect 202, the remaining time display section (different additional display section) is displayed in the common first firing direction notification effect 202 ) is added, and a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second first firing direction notification effect (the game ball passes through the specific area), as shown in FIG. 46 ( c) and the common jackpot round production (FIG. 47(g), etc.). The presence or absence of the remaining time display unit 206 (whether or not the second first firing direction notification effect is executed) is a big hit game in which the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a direct hit and the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is small. This is a different point from a small winning game that starts as a winning.

Also, in the small-hit game, the big-hit game is started by satisfying the specific condition (the game ball passes through the specific area) during execution of the second first firing direction notification effect. Based on the start of the big-hit game in this small-hit game, the aforementioned common big-hit round production (FIG. 47(g), etc.) is executed. In addition, during the small winning game (before the remaining time becomes "0"), if the game ball is passed through the specific area, it becomes a big hit at that point, and again the first shooting direction notification effect 202 of FIG. 46(b). 47(g), the process immediately shifts to the jackpot game effect (jackpot round effect) shown in FIG. 47(g).

FIG. 47(g) shows that during the small winning game shown in FIG. It shows a scene where a big hit game (first special game) has started. In this embodiment, the jackpot game performance (jackpot round performance, special game performance) executed in the jackpot game that is executed as a jackpot via a small hit results in a jackpot (direct hit jackpot) as a result of the special symbol success/failure determination. It is set to the same display mode as the big hit game production (big hit round production, special game production) executed. Thus, in the mode of the present embodiment, there is little difference in the game effects executed by the end of the big win game between the big win game started by the direct hit big win and the big win game started by the big win via small win, The player can execute the big win executed at any occasion without a sense of incompatibility. Also, this makes it possible to play the game smoothly even if the player does not understand the complicated game features. On the other hand, a skilled player who has a good understanding of the complicated game characteristics starts a big win game started by a direct hit big win and a small win via a big win depending on whether or not the second first shooting direction notification effect is executed. By distinguishing the game from the jackpot game and grasping the difference between the jackpot games, it is possible to enjoy the game more deeply and increase the interest in the game.

However, not limited to such a mode, in the case of a big hit via a small hit (big hit via a small hit) and the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit (direct hit big hit), the big hit game production (big hit You may change the display mode of round production). This may make it easier to distinguish between the big win game started by the direct hit big win and the big win game started by the small win via big win. Since the jackpot game shown in FIG. 47(g) is a 10-round jackpot, the number of "○" displayed in the round display section is ten. Since other display modes are the same as in FIG. 46(c), the description is omitted. In addition, during the execution of the small hit game (during the execution of the second first firing direction notification effect) (before the remaining time becomes "0"), the specific condition could not be satisfied (the specific area If the ball does not pass through), the hit game (small hit game ) is executed to end the winning game (minor winning game).

In addition, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a game state, high base state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state) and low base state (normal state, non-time saving state) , and it is possible to change the game state based on whether the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit or a small hit. In particular, the change of the game state from the low base state (normal state) to the high base state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state) is executed after the jackpot game ends. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the game state from a low base state (normal state) to a high base state without going through such a big win or a small win, instead of changing the game state through such a big win or a small win. It has a function to change to a state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state).

Specifically, after the jackpot game is finished, or when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM), the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined specific number of times (for example, 550 times) ( However, the game state is changed from a low base state (normal state) to a high base state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state) based on the fact that the result of the special symbol suitability determination is out. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, or from the time of turning on the power (when turning on the power after clearing the RAM), counting means for counting the number of times the special symbols are displayed fluctuating is provided, and the variable display of the special symbols is performed in advance. If the result of the special symbol propriety determination becomes a big hit before the predetermined specific number of times is executed, the count of the specific number of times is reset.

Also, when the count value of the counting means reaches a specific number, the game state is changed from a low base state (normal state) to a high base state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state). The high base state may be changed to the second time saving state. In addition, the setting period of the second time saving state may be set to the same length as the longest time period of the time saving state set after the big win game (for example, 500 times), or the time saving state set after the big win game. It may be set to a period longer than the longest period of the state (eg, 800 times). Further, instead of such a mode, when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit or a small hit, the count of the specific number of times may be reset. In addition, when a jackpot game is executed, the count of the specific number of times may be reset. Also, when a big win game or a small win game is executed, the count of the specific number of times may be reset.

Also, the specific number of times is set to be a number longer than the longest period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game. As a result, even if the time saving state set after the big hit game is any, even if it shifts to the normal state without becoming a big hit during the time saving state, by reaching the specific number of times, the low base state It is possible to change from (normal state) to a high base state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state). By having such a function, it is possible to protect a player who cannot get a big win even after playing the game for a long time by providing an advantageous game state without getting a big win. . Further, this makes it difficult for the player to stop the game when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols approaches the specific number of times, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, the chance period (second time saving state) that shifts by continuously executing the deviation variation of the specific number of times (550 times) is between the big hit game, or between the initial state and the big hit game, once shall be executed only. Therefore, for example, even if the chance period (for example, 800 times) is over and the deviation variation is repeated for a specific number of times (550 times), the chance period will not be set again. If there is no big hit during the chance period, the chance period is terminated and the game state shifts to the low base state. In addition, the loss variation refers to a variation display that does not result in a big hit. Also, the deviation variation may include a small hit.

47(a) to (e) and FIGS. 48(f) to (i), the aforementioned game state changing function will be described. FIG. 47(a) shows a scene in which the first special symbol suitability determination is executed in the normal state, and the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the determination result of the first special symbol suitability determination. As shown in FIG. 47(a), three first effect pending display areas 9c (first effect pending display portion) in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a are displayed with three first effect pending 9a (symbols of "O"). ing. This indicates that there are three pieces of undigested information (information such as special symbol propriety determination random numbers) acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 . In addition, in the variable pattern display area 9e at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a slightly larger "O" pattern than the first effect holding 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Depending on the display mode of this variable pattern 9f, there is a possibility that the result of the currently executed variable display will result in a big win (stop display with a big win pattern).

FIG. 47(b) shows that, as a result of the variable display of the production pattern 8 shown in FIG. 47(a), the off production pattern ("367") in which at least one of the three production patterns is different from the other production patterns is stopped and displayed. It shows a scene where In other words, it is a variable display of the performance symbol executed based on the fact that the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out. FIG. 47(c) shows a scene where the variable display of the next performance symbol starts after the variable display of the performance symbol has ended in FIG. 47(b). At the top of the display screen 7a, a chance period display section 207 indicating the remaining period until the chance period is displayed. The remaining number of times (remaining period) until changing to an advantageous state) is displayed.

The chance period display section 207 displays "50 times left!". As a result, after 50 times, the result of the variation display of the production pattern continues to be out (by continuously executing the loss variation), and the loss variation is continuously executed a specific number of times (550 times). Then (the special condition is established), the player is notified that the game state will change to the high base state (the chance period will start) without going through the big win. In this way, when the remaining number of times until the count value of the counting means reaches the specific number of times (550 times) reaches the second number of times (50 times), the chance period display section 207 for notifying the remaining number of times is displayed. Since the high base state (chance period) executed by the deviation fluctuation continuing for a specific number of times is the most advantageous second time saving state in the game state set in this pachinko game machine, the player can display the chance period When the part 207 is displayed, there are players who play the game with a different feeling from before the chance period display part 207 is displayed, such as expecting to lose rather than to hit a big hit. Occur. As a result, it is possible to provide a variety of game properties and increase the interest in the game.

Also, when displaying the chance period display section, by displaying the specific character 210 that is displayed along with the above-described big win game or small win game, the current state (game situation) is an advantageous state ( game status). As a result, the player intuitively feels that the game is advantageous, and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game. FIG. 47(d) shows a scene during execution of the variable display of the next effect symbol of FIG. 47(c), and the result of the variable display of the effect symbol of FIG. , the remaining period 207a displayed in the chance period display section 207 is 49 times. That is, including the result of the variation display being executed, it is shown that the chance period (high base state, second short time state) is reached by continuing the 49th deviation variation.

Figure 47 (e) shows that 48 times of deviation fluctuations are continuously executed from the variable display of the effect symbol shown in Figure 47 (d), and the chance period (high base state, second time reduction state) is left to 1 time It shows what happened. The chance period display portion 207 displays "One more time!" to indicate that the remaining period 207a is one time. In other words, it shows a scene in which the 549th deviation display is continuously performed and the 550th variation display is being performed.

FIG. 48(f) shows a scene in which the result of the variation display of the production symbols shown in FIG. showing. In the chance period transition effect 208, a specific character 210 is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and one effect pattern ("7") is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen. Based on the end of the variable display of the specific number of production patterns, although the state is shifted to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the result of the variable display of the specific number of production patterns is a failure (jackpot game (because it is not executed), it is not possible to display the winning symbol combination with the same three digits.

Therefore, by displaying only one effect symbol, the player is suggested to be in an advantageous state. In addition, the production pattern (“7”, transition pattern) indicating the transition to the chance period transition production 208 is the most popular jackpot pattern displayed based on the result of the special pattern propriety determination being a win (jackpot). It is preferable to set the effect pattern ("777") corresponding to an advantageous big hit (such as a effect pattern indicating confirmation of the second time saving state). This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the transition to the advantageous state (second time saving state). Also, in the present embodiment, the number of effect symbols displayed in the chance period transition effect 208 is one ("7"), but two same effect symbols (for example, "77") may be used.

FIG. 48(g) shows a scene in which the chance period transition effect 208 of FIG. 48(f) is continuously executed. On the display screen 7a, the specific character 210 and the characters "entering the second time saving state!!" indicating that the game state will shift to the second time saving state are displayed. In addition, these chance period transition effects 208 are executed during the variable display period of the effect symbols (special symbols).

FIG. 48(h) shows a scene in which the chance period transition effect 208 executed in FIG. 48(g) is finished and the result of the variable display for the specified number of times is displayed. A specific character 210 is displayed on the display screen, and at least one of the three performance symbols is stopped to display a lost symbol (loose symbol combination, "678") different from the other performance symbols. Moreover, it is preferable to include the performance symbol (“7”, transition symbol) displayed in the chance period transition performance 208 in one of the outlier symbol combinations. In this embodiment, the outlier symbol combination is "678", and the transition symbol "7" is included. In other words, it is shown that the result of the variable display of the performance symbols for the specified number of times is a loss, and the stop-displayed loss symbol is "678".

FIG. 48(i) shows a scene in which the variable display of the next effect symbol is started based on the completion of the variable display of the effect symbol shown in FIG. 48(h). In FIG. 48(h), the special condition that the deviation variation is continuously executed for a specific number of times is established, and the game state is set to the second time saving state from the next variation display of the specific number of times shown in FIG. 48(i). ing. A game state notification unit 209 is provided on the display screen, and a "second time saving state" mode display ( game state suggestion display) is made. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second time saving state set in the chance period continues until the deviation variation is continuously performed 800 times.

Since the second time-saving state is given to a player who has not played a big win game for a long period of time, the set number of times is set to a long period enough to guarantee the next big win. is preferred. For example, it is possible to set the number of times that the big win occurs with a probability of 95% or more, or the number of times that the big win occurs with a probability of 99% or more. Moreover, you may set a 2nd time saving state until the next big hit occurs. As a result, the player can play the game with a sense of security, and the situation of shifting to the normal state again can be avoided as much as possible without getting a big winning game in the specially set second time-saving state.

49 to 53, the execution mode (performance mode, transition mode) of the chance period of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 49(a) shows a scene in which the first special symbol suitability determination is executed in the normal state, and the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the determination result of the first special symbol suitability determination. As shown in FIG. 49(a), three first effect pending display areas 9c (first effect pending display portion) at the lower left of the display screen 7a are displayed with three first effect pending 9a (symbols of "O"). ing. This indicates that there are three pieces of undigested information (information such as special symbol propriety determination random numbers) acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 . In addition, in the variable pattern display area 9e at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a slightly larger "O" pattern than the first effect holding 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Depending on the display mode of this variable pattern 9f, there is a possibility that the result of the currently executed variable display will result in a big win (stop display with a big win pattern).

FIG. 49(b) shows that, as a result of the variable display of the production pattern 8 shown in FIG. 49(a), the off production pattern ("367"), in which at least one of the three production patterns is different from the other production patterns, is stopped and displayed. It shows a scene where In other words, it is a variable display of the performance symbols executed based on the fact that the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out. FIG. 49(c) shows a scene in which the variable display of the next performance symbol is started based on the completion of the variable display of the performance symbol in FIG. 49(b). At the top of the display screen 7a, "count mode start" is displayed to indicate that the count mode has been entered. This count mode (first count effect) is a effect mode for notifying the player that the execution of the chance period is approaching. It is executed when it becomes a chance period).

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a chance period display section 207 indicating the remaining period until the chance period is displayed. The remaining number of times (the remaining period is displayed) until the second time saving state that continues until. That is, the remaining number of times (remaining period) 207a until the game state changes from a low base state (disadvantageous state, first specific state) to a high base state (advantageous state, second time saving state, second specific state) Is displayed. Specifically, the chance period display section 207 displays “50 times left!”. As a result, in the normal state (low base state, first specific state), the result of the fluctuation display of the production design (special design) continues to be out 50 times after ), the deviation variation has been continuously executed a specific number of times (550 times) (the special condition is established), and the game state has changed to a time saving state (high base state, second time saving state, second The player is notified that the state changes to a specific state (the chance period starts).

In this way, when the remaining number of times until the count value of the counting means reaches the specific number of times (550 times) reaches the second number of times (50 times), the chance period display section 207 that notifies the remaining number of times is displayed. In addition, in the count mode, since the end of the previous jackpot game, the variation display in which the result of the variation display of the special symbol is out (hereinafter also referred to as "loss variation") is continuously executed for the first number of times (500). is executed on the condition that That is, when the count value of the counting means reaches the first number of times (500), the count mode is executed, and when it reaches the specific number of times (550), the chance period is executed. The count value of the counting means is reset (to "0") when a big win is achieved, and is counted from 1 again after the big win is completed.

In addition, the high base state (chance period, second time saving state) that is executed when the deviation fluctuation continues for a specific number of times (550 times) is the most advantageous second time saving state in the game state set in this pachinko game machine Therefore, when the chance period display section 207 is displayed (when the count mode is executed), the player will be able to enjoy more time than a big win during the period after that (the period during which the count mode is executed). The game is played with the expectation of being out. Therefore, before and after the chance period display portion 207 is displayed (the count mode is executed), there are players who play the game with different senses of the game (expecting a big win or expecting a loss). . As a result, it is possible to provide a variety of playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the count mode, the friend character 223 (first character) and the enemy character 224 (second character) displayed with the above-described big win game and small win game are displayed. A battle presentation 222 is executed in which these ally characters 223 (first character) and enemy characters 224 (second character) fight. The current state (game situation) in the count mode changes depending on the execution status of this battle production (whether the ally character wins, the enemy character wins, or the situation is inconclusive (win, lose, draw)). It suggests whether it is in an advantageous state (game situation) for the player.

As a result, the player can intuitively feel whether the situation is favorable or unfavorable by looking at the battle effect or the additional effect executed along with the battle effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. In addition, a condition notification section 228 indicating a condition for shifting to the chance period is provided in the lower right portion of the display screen, and "Chance period if you lose to 0" is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that when the remaining period 207a displayed in the chance period display section 207 becomes "0" (there is no more), the chance period will shift.

FIG. 49(d) executes the variable display of the next production design of FIG. 49(c), and stops the production design (“382”) based on the fact that the result of the special design propriety determination is out. Shows the displayed scene. Also, in the count mode, it is shown that the remaining period 207a displayed on the chance period display section 207 has become 49 times based on the fact that the variable display of the effect symbols is executed once. That is, it is shown that the chance period (high base state, second short time state) is caused by continuing the 49 times later deviation fluctuation (the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out).

FIG. 49(e) shows a scene during execution of the variable display 29 times after the variable display of FIG. 49(d). In addition, the count mode shown in FIG. 49(e) continues, and the result of the variation display (29 times) executed between FIG. 49(d) and FIG. results) indicate that they were all out. In addition, the remaining period 207a displayed in the chance period display unit 207 is 20 times, and the 20th loss fluctuation (the result of the special symbol propriety determination is lost) continues, resulting in a chance period (high base state, second time saving state). If a jackpot is achieved during execution of the count mode, the count mode is terminated and the count value of the counting means is reset to "0". FIG. 49(f) shows a scene in which the same variable display as in FIG. 49(e) is being executed and a predetermined time has passed since FIG. 49(e). In the left display area of the display screen, the production pattern is a ready-to-win mode 225 ("4↓4") in which the "4" pattern is the ready-to-win pattern, indicating a scene in which the ready-to-win production is executed.

FIG. 50(g) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 49(f) during execution of the same variable display as in FIG. 49(f). Also, the count mode shown in FIG. 49(f) is continuously executed. Further, in FIG. 50(g), the ready-to-win effect ("4↓4") executed in FIG. 49(f) is continuously executed. As mentioned above, the count mode ends when the jackpot is reached. Therefore, the execution of the ready-to-win effect (battle effect) may end the count mode, which is an undesirable situation for the player. The chance period that is executed by satisfying the conditions in the count mode (do not lose until "0", that is, the variation continues until it reaches "0") is more important than the occurrence of a big hit during the count mode High value for the player (high possibility of high profit, high average number of balls won). Therefore, if the big win occurs at this timing even though the chance period has come to be executed only by the continuous execution of the 20th loss variation, although the big win game can provide some profit, The execution of the chance period (gaming profit obtained by executing the chance period) is missed, which is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

Therefore, in order to indicate that a big hit at this timing is not advantageous to the player (the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect may end the count mode), the situation notification section 229 at the top of the display screen , "Pinch pinch pinch" is displayed. Also, in substantially the center of the display screen, a battle production 222 is being executed in which an ally character 223 (first character) and an enemy character 224 (second character) fight, and a scene in which the enemy character 224 attacks the ally character 223. It is shown. When the enemy character wins against the ally character (when the ally character is defeated), it becomes a big win (first specific big win), and the last stop symbol is the same "4" symbol as the ready-to-win symbol, and is stopped and displayed ("444"). . Then, the count mode is ended, and a big win game (first specific big win game) is executed.

Although the details will be described later, the battle effect (ready effect) in the count mode (result of the game effect), when the enemy character wins (when it becomes the first execution mode), determines whether the special symbol is right or wrong (first The result of the special symbol suitability determination) becomes the first specific jackpot ("444") which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and the count mode is terminated. Further, when the ally character wins (when the second execution mode is reached), the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) is relatively advantageous to the player (more advantageous than the first specific jackpot). The second specific jackpot ("777") is reached and the count mode ends. In addition, when both characters (ally character and enemy character) cannot be settled (when the third execution mode is reached), the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out and the count mode is continued (in this case, the game It becomes the most advantageous playing situation for the player).

In addition, the ready-to-win effect (battle effect) in the count mode first reaches the "4" symbol that constitutes the big-hit symbol ("444") that is stopped and displayed in the event of a relatively disadvantageous big win (first specific big win). Start as a pattern. Then, when the first specific big win is achieved, a predetermined character performance (a performance in which the enemy character wins or the ally character loses) is executed, and the final stop pattern is stop-displayed with the same ``4'' pattern as the ready-to-win pattern, and the big win is achieved. The symbol ("444") is fixed and displayed. In the case of the second specific jackpot, when the ready-to-win pattern is changed from the "4" pattern ("4↓4", the first pattern, the unfavorable pattern) to a relatively advantageous jackpot (the second specific jackpot). The jackpot pattern ("777") to be stopped and displayed is changed to a "7" pattern (second pattern, advantageous pattern) ("7↓7"), and a predetermined character presentation (a presentation in which the ally character wins) is performed. After execution, the last stop pattern is stop-displayed with the same ``7'' pattern as the ready-to-win pattern, and the jackpot pattern ('777') is fixedly stopped-displayed. In addition, in the case of a failure, a predetermined character presentation (a presentation that the fight between the ally character and the enemy character continues, a presentation that withstands the attack) is executed, and the final stop pattern is different from the ready-to-win pattern ("4" pattern). A symbol (for example, "5" symbol) is stopped and displayed, and a lost symbol ("454", lost symbol combination) is determined and displayed. In addition, in the reach effect (battle effect) in the count mode, if the reach pattern change effect (symbol change effect) in which the reach pattern changes from the "4" pattern to the "7" pattern is performed, the big hit (second specific It may be a jackpot).

FIG. 50(h) shows the same variable display as FIG. 50(g), showing a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 50(g). Also, the count mode shown in FIG. 50(g) continues. In FIG. 50(h), the ready-to-win effect (battle effect) that was being executed is lost (the result of the special symbol propriety determination is lost), and the fight between the ally character and the enemy character continues (effect of withstanding the attack). is executed, the final stop symbol is stop-displayed as a ready-to-win symbol (“4” symbol) and a different symbol (“5” symbol), and the lost symbol (“454”) is fixed and stopped-displayed. The situation notification unit 229 displays a message “Endured, continued!” (indicating that the result (loss) is advantageous to the player), indicating that the reach is out (loss fluctuation), and the count mode continues. to be notified. In addition, since the out of reach (loss fluctuation) is confirmed, the remaining period 207a displayed in the chance period display section 207 is reduced by 1 to 19 times.

FIG. 50(i) shows a scene of variable display 18 times after the variable display of FIG. 50(h). In addition, the count mode shown in FIG. 50(h) continues, and the results of (18 times) variation display executed between FIG. 50(h) and FIG. Results) show that they were all out. Further, since the change display shown in FIG. 50(i) is also an out-of-range change (“246”) and the fixed stop display is performed, the remaining period 207a displayed in the chance period display section 207 is one. That is, one time later (the next variation display) If it becomes an off variation (the result of the special symbol propriety determination is off), it is shown that it moves to the chance period (high base state, second time saving state) ing.

FIG. 50(j) shows a scene where the variable display following the variable display of FIG. 50(i) is executed. The variation display in FIG. 50(j) is the 50th variation display from the start of the count mode, and is also the 550th variation display from the end of the previous big hit game. In addition, in the display area on the left side of the display screen (performance symbol display section), the result of the executed variable display (result of special symbol propriety determination) is displayed as a missing symbol ("234") indicating that the result is out, and the count is performed. It shows a scene where the 50th variation display from the start of the mode is determined by deviation (the result of special symbol propriety determination is determined by deviation). Also, the remaining period 207a displayed in the chance period display section 207 is 0 times. By simultaneously displaying the fact that the remaining period displayed on the chance period display unit 207 has become "0" and the condition display of the condition notification unit 228 (the chance period if the player does not lose to "0"), the condition is notified. The player can grasp that the condition (special condition) shown in part 228 has been achieved. As a result, it is determined that the next variable display is shifted to the chance period (high base state, second short time state).

Also, in the center of the display screen, an ally character 223 (first character) and an enemy character 224 (second character) are displayed facing each other, indicating that the battle between the two has not been settled. . In other words, it indicates that the friend character 223 (first character) did not lose to the enemy character 224 (second character) as the condition shown in the condition notification section 229 .

Also, the missing symbol when the special condition is established may be a predetermined symbol (symbol combination) ("234" in this embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game ends and the variation is continuously executed 550 times (specific number of times), a privilege (chance period) is given, and the 550th (specific number of times) If the variable display is out, a predetermined special out symbol ("234" in this embodiment, a combination of special out symbols, a chance period fixed symbol, and a first special out symbol) shall be stopped and displayed. . As a result, the player can grasp the achievement of the special condition, that is, the transition to the chance period, by confirming that the stop symbol of the specific number of times (the 50th time in the count mode) has become the special missing symbol. becomes possible. In addition, this enables the player to enhance his/her interest in the game. In addition, in this embodiment, there is also a case where the shift to the chance period occurs without going through the count mode. It may be a second special missing symbol (for example, "367", second chance period fixed symbol) different from. As a result, the player can grasp the kind of production process through which the transition to the chance period is made by looking at the type of the winning symbol when the special condition is established.

FIG. 50(k) shows a scene where the variable display following the variable display of FIG. 50(i) is executed. As described above, in the scene shown in FIG. 50(j), the chance period starts from the variable display shown in FIG. 50(k) due to the establishment of the special condition. In addition, since the chance period starts from the variable display following the variable display in which the special condition is established, in this embodiment, the variable display in which the special condition is achieved (established) (the 550th fluctuation display from the end of the previous big hit game). Instead, in the next variation display (variation display in FIG. 50 (k), 551st variation display) after the variation display (550th variation display from the end of the previous jackpot game) in which the special condition is achieved (established), the chance period An achievement presentation 231 is executed to indicate that the transition to .

In the central part of the display screen, the friendly character 223 (first character) and the enemy character 224 (second character) that were displayed in the previous variable display (variable display that achieved the special condition) are similarly displayed facing each other. It is In addition, along with the start of the variable display of the performance symbols, in the left display area (performance symbol display section) of the display screen, the stop symbol (special missing symbol, "234 ”) is variably displayed (shaking variation) in a predetermined display mode. Also, in the upper right display area of the display screen, the launch direction notification section 230 is displayed at the start of the chance period. The firing direction notification part 230 displayed at this timing (before execution of the achievement effect or before the end of the achievement effect) indicates the firing direction in a less conspicuous manner than the firing direction notification part 230 displayed after the completion of the achievement effect. . In this embodiment, the display time is set to a relatively short time (compared to the firing direction notification section after the completion of the achievement effect). In addition to this, the display size may be reduced, or the display color may be a less conspicuous display color. In addition, the shooting direction notification unit displays an "arrow symbol indicating right hitting and right hitting" indicating that the shooting direction of the game ball is the right game area (indicating that the left game area has been switched to the right game area). do.

In order to show the fairness of the game, the shooting direction notification unit 230 is displayed at the timing when the game state is switched. It is more effective to display the shooting direction notification part shown in FIG. Therefore, in this variable display (variable display at the start of the chance period), the firing direction reporting unit is displayed for a predetermined time (approximately 1 second) and then temporarily terminated (erased). is to be displayed. The display of the firing direction notifying unit to be executed anew is displayed for a longer time than the display of the firing direction notifying unit to be executed first. Specifically, after that, the display is continued until the chance period ends unless there is a reason such as execution of a special game effect.

FIG. 50(l) shows the same variable display as FIG. 50(k) after a predetermined time has elapsed. At the center of the display screen, the characters “Achievement” are displayed in large letters, and in the count mode, the deviation variation is executed 50 times (second time), and an achievement effect indicating that the special conditions for shifting to the chance period have been achieved. 231. In addition, the achievement effect 231 is executed, and the display of the shooting direction notifying portion displayed in FIG. 50(k) is temporarily terminated (erased). In addition, on the reverse side of the achievement effect (letter of achievement), a friendly character 223 (first character) and an enemy character 224 (second character) are similarly displayed facing each other. It shows a scene in which a variable display) stop symbol (special missing symbol, "234") is variably displayed (shake variation) in a predetermined display mode.

FIG. 51(m) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed in the same variable display as in FIG. 50(l). Also, the achievement effect 231 of FIG. 50(l) is continuously executed. In the central portion of the display screen, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (“234”) are displayed in an enlarged manner while being variably displayed. there is FIG. 51(n) shows the same variable display as FIG. 51(m) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Also, the achievement effect of FIG. 51(m) is continuously executed. In FIG. 51(n), a symbol increase effect is executed to increase the number of effect symbols to be displayed, and the second teammate character 227 attacks the increased symbols in order, thereby changing the effect symbol to a different display mode. It shows a scene where a display mode change effect 238 (symbol change effect, rush effect) is performed.

In this embodiment, the game is played using different display patterns of the performance symbols depending on the performance mode (count mode, chance period, etc.). For example, the first effect symbol 211 is used in the normal state (low base state, count mode) which is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player, and the first effect is used in a relatively advantageous game state (high base state) for the player. A second production pattern 212 having a pattern and a display mode different from each other is used. In addition, even in a game state (high-base state) that is relatively advantageous to the player, different display modes are displayed depending on whether the first time-saving state (first high-base state) or the second time-saving state (second high-base state). Directed patterns may be used. The symbol display mode change effect 238 (symbol change effect, rush effect) means that the first effect symbol 211 used in the normal state (low base state, count mode), which is a game state relatively disadvantageous to the player, is displayed to the player. This is an effect to change to the second effect symbol 212 used in a relatively advantageous game state (high base state).

FIG. 51(o) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed in the same variable display as in FIG. 51(n). Also, the achievement effect 231 and the symbol display mode change effect 238 of FIG. 51(n) are continuously executed. In the central part of the display screen, the second teammate character 227 sequentially attacks the first production patterns 211 displayed on the display screen (performs a special production of contacting the first production pattern) and attacks (performs a special production). ) The first production pattern 211 is changed to the second production pattern 212 . Specifically, the performance symbols “1” and “2” are changed from the first performance design 211 to the second performance design 212 .

FIG. 51(p) shows the same variable display as in FIG. 51(o) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Also, the achievement effect 231 and the symbol display mode change effect 238 of FIG. 51(o) are continuously executed. The central portion of the display screen shows a scene in which the second teammate character 227 executes a special effect, thereby changing all the first effect symbols displayed on the display screen to the second effect symbols. This indicates that the subsequent game will be executed with the second effect symbol 212, that is, the game state will shift to an advantageous game state (high base state) for the player.

FIG. 51(q) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed in the same variable display as in FIG. 51(p). Also, the achievement effect 231 of FIG. 51(p) is continuously executed. In FIG. 51(p), a transition mode notification effect 233 is executed in the central portion of the display screen. In the transition mode notification effect 233 of FIG. 51(p), the first chance period notification effect 233a that is executed when shifting to the chance period through the count mode is executed.

FIG. 51(r) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed in the same variable display as in FIG. 51(q). Also, the achievement effect 231 of FIG. 51(q) is continuously executed. FIG. 51(r) shows a scene in which the effect symbols are deviated and fixed stop display is performed, and the variable display (first time in the chance period) that has been executed from FIG. 50(k) is terminated. A lost symbol ("234", third special lost symbol) composed of the second performance symbols is stop-displayed in the central part of the display screen. In addition, an effect mode notification unit 221 is provided at the upper left of the display screen, and "chance period" is displayed to indicate that the effect mode being executed is the chance period. In addition, a shooting direction notification unit 230 is provided at the upper right of the display screen, and displays a "right-handed and right-arrow symbol" for instructing a game by shooting a game ball in the right game area. Also, in the right part of the display screen, an ally character 223 (first character) is displayed to indicate that the chance period has been successfully executed.

The outlier pattern (“234”) that is displayed as a fixed stop in the first variation display in the chance period is the same as the last (variation display that has achieved the special condition) in the count mode (“234”). It is designed with numbers. That is, in the achievement effect executed in the first variable display in the chance period, the display mode (the number is the same) of the last (variable display that has achieved the special condition) stop symbol (special missing symbol) in the count mode is changed. It is said to be a performance to do. The lost symbol in the first variable display in the chance period in which the number is the same and the display mode is changed is also called a special lost symbol 240 (third special lost symbol). However, the stop display of the special lost symbol 240 in the first variable display during the chance period is limited to the case where the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is lost. When the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is a big hit, the ready-to-win performance is executed without executing the achievement performance along with the first variation display in the chance period, and the first performance symbol 211 is executed. , a predetermined jackpot symbol (for example, "777") is fixed and displayed. In other words, even when the chance period has shifted, there are cases where the achievement presentation is executed and cases where it is not executed.

FIGS. 52(a) to (c) show an execution mode in which the first jackpot (disadvantage jackpot, first specific jackpot) is achieved during execution of the count mode. That is, it shows an execution mode in which a big win (first specific big win) is achieved without satisfying a special condition (before the number of outlier fluctuations reaches a specific number of times in succession). FIG. 52(a) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 50(g) in the same variable display as FIG. 50(g). Further, in FIG. 52(a), the count mode shown in FIG. 50(g) and the ready-to-win effect (“4↓4”, battle effect) shown in FIG. 50(g) are continuously executed. .

As described above, the count mode continues when the deviation variation continues, and ends when a big hit is achieved. Therefore, the execution of the ready-to-win effect (battle effect) is an effect that notifies that there is a risk that the count mode will end (the chance period cannot be executed), and that the player is in an unfavorable gaming situation. showing. In FIG. 52(a), similarly to FIG. 50(g), "Pinch, pinch, pinch" is displayed in the situation reporting section 229 at the top of the display screen. Also, in substantially the center of the display screen, a battle production 222 is being executed in which an ally character 223 (first character) and an enemy character 224 (second character) fight, and the enemy character 224 attacks the ally character 223 further. A scene is shown.

FIG. 52(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed from FIG. 52(a) in the same variable display as FIG. 52(a). In addition, in FIG. 52(b), the enemy character 224 wins over the ally character 223 (the ally character 223 is defeated) in the ready-to-win effect (“4↓4”, battle effect 222) shown in FIG. 52(a). A scene is shown. In the upper part of the display screen, the character "LOSE" indicating that the ally character 223 has been defeated is displayed, and in the left display area of the display screen, the final stop symbol is stopped at the same "4" symbol as the ready-to-win symbol. The winning pattern 234 (first specific jackpot pattern, jackpot pattern, "444") is fixed and displayed. As a result, the big hit in the count mode is confirmed, and the count mode ends without satisfying the special condition, that is, the player is notified that the chance period could not be executed at this opportunity. be.

FIG. 52(c) shows a scene in which the second winning notification effect 237 (notification of the first specific big winning) is executed based on the big winning in FIG. 52(b). As described above, this big win is not an advantageous game situation for the player. Therefore, characters such as "big win" or "congratulations" are not directly displayed to indicate the big win, and a game ball is shot into the right game area to play the game. A launch direction notification unit 230 for notifying that the In addition, since the result of the special symbol suitability determination is not a loss (it is a hit), direct character display indicating the loss such as "missing" or "sorry" is not performed. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be expected. In addition, in this way, by notifying the start/execution of the big win game by the shooting direction notification unit 230 without directly displaying characters indicating the big win, the big win game (first specific big win game, special 1 jackpot C) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is shifted to a game state corresponding to the jackpot game (first time-saving state of five times of time-saving).

In the above example, the case where a relatively disadvantageous jackpot (first specific jackpot, special figure 1 jackpot C) occurs during execution of the count mode has been described. Next, FIGS. 52(d) to 52(f) show how the second big win (advantageous big win, second specific big win) is achieved during execution of the count mode. That is, it shows an execution mode in which a big win (first specific big win) is achieved without satisfying the special condition (before the number of consecutive failure fluctuations reaches a specific number of times) in the same manner as described above. This execution mode is the same in that the count mode ends without satisfying the special condition, but since the big win is more advantageous to the player than in the above-described execution mode, the variation display related to the big win is being performed. Different game performances are executed as a game performance and a jackpot notification performance.

FIG. 52(d) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 50(g) in the same variable display as FIG. 50(g). Further, in FIG. 52(d), the count mode shown in FIG. 50(g) and the ready-to-win effect (“4↓4”, battle effect) shown in FIG. 50(g) are continuously executed. . In FIG. 52(d), similarly to FIG. 50(g), the battle production 222 in which the friend character 223 (first character) and the enemy character 224 (second character) fight is continued, and the friend character 223 is the enemy. A scene in which the character 224 avoids attacks is shown. That is, it indicates that it is an attack chance for the ally character.

Also, when the ready-to-win pattern 225 shown in the ready-to-win state of FIG. 224 attack is avoided (advantageous effect) is executed, the ready-to-win pattern is changed from "4" pattern ("4↓4") to "7" pattern (which suggests an advantageous jackpot (second jackpot)) "7↓7") shows a scene that has changed. This ready-to-win pattern is changed from a pattern ("4") suggesting a disadvantageous jackpot (first specific jackpot) to a pattern ("7") indicating a favorable jackpot (second specific jackpot) in accordance with the above-mentioned advantageous effect. The changing effect is called a symbol change effect 232 (symbol type change effect). The upper portion of the display screen shows a scene in which the ready-to-win symbols have changed to "7↓7" as a result of executing the symbol change effect 232 (symbol type change effect).

FIG. 52(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 52(d) in the same variable display as in FIG. 52(d). FIG. 52(e) shows a scene in which the ally character 223 wins over the enemy character 224 in the ready-to-win effect (“7↓7”, battle effect 222) shown in FIG. 52(d). In the upper part of the display screen, the characters "WIN" indicating that the ally character 223 has won are displayed, and in the left display area of the display screen, the final stop symbol is stopped at the same "7" symbol as the ready-to-win symbol. The winning symbol 234 (second specific big winning symbol, big winning symbol, "777") is fixed and displayed. As a result, the big hit in the count mode is confirmed, and the count mode ends without satisfying the special condition, that is, the player is notified that the chance period could not be executed at this opportunity. be.

FIG. 52(f) shows a scene in which the first win notification effect 236 (notification of the second specific big win) is executed based on the big win (second specific big win) in FIG. 52(e). . As described above, this big win is not an advantageous game situation for the player compared to the execution of the chance period. On the other hand, since this is a big win that is more advantageous for the player than the above-described big win (first specific big win), the first win notification effect 236 is executed. In the first hit notification effect 236, a big hit pattern is displayed in a large size (using a display area of 1/3 or more) in the center of the display screen ("777"). Also, in the upper part of the display screen, a message "entering a super special mode" is displayed, which indicates that the game will shift to a relatively advantageous performance mode for the player, though not as much as during the chance period. In addition, a shooting direction notification unit 230 is displayed in the upper right display area of the display screen to notify that a game ball is to be shot in the right game area to play the game. In addition, the jackpot game (second specific jackpot game, special jackpot A or special jackpot B) is performed by the main jackpot (second specific jackpot, special picture 1 jackpot A or special picture 1 jackpot B). After executing the big win game, the game state corresponding to the big win game (first time saving state of 50 times or 90 times) is entered.

Next, using FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), an execution mode in which the chance period is entered without going through the count mode will be described. The count mode, which is one of the performance modes, is executed by continuously executing deviation fluctuations 500 times (the first number of times) after the end of the jackpot game. And, in the count mode, by continuously executing 50 times (second times) deviation variation, that is, 550 times (first number + second number) deviation variation from the end of the jackpot game continues. By being executed, it becomes a chance period, and the game state shifts from the low base state to the high base state (second time saving state). In addition, this chance period (high base state, second short time state) continues until the deviation variation is continuously executed 800 times.

Moreover, in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, there is also a case where the production mode shifts to the chance period without going through the count mode. Concretely, when the pachinko game machine is initialized by RAM clear processing, the previous big hit information is erased. In this initialization state, if the deviation variation is continuously executed 550 times, the chance period is entered without executing the count mode on the way. In addition, even if the RAM is not cleared, if the winning variation is continuously executed 550 times in a state where the factory-shipped jackpot information is not stored, the chance period is canceled without executing the count mode on the way. transition to Also, when the power is turned on, if the RAM is not cleared (initialized), and if the previous big hit occurrence information is stored (backed up), the number of consecutive deviation fluctuations from the end of the big win game is stored. (backed up). Then, when the number of times obtained by adding the stored number of consecutive deviation fluctuations and the number of consecutive deviation fluctuations executed after power-on reaches 500 times (first number), the count mode is executed. Then, in the count mode, when the 50 times (the second number) of outlier fluctuations are continuously executed, the chance period is entered.

In addition, when the power is turned on, if the RAM is not cleared (initialized), the number of consecutive deviation fluctuations from the end of the previous jackpot game is stored (backed up), and the stored deviation fluctuations are stored (backed up). and the number of consecutive deviation fluctuations executed after power-on is between 501 and 550 times (that is, the period during which the count mode is originally executed), the count mode shall not be executed. Then, when the number of times obtained by adding the stored number of consecutive failure fluctuations and the number of consecutive failure fluctuations executed after power-on reaches 550 times, the chance period is entered.

FIG. 53(a) shows a scene in which the 550th deviation variation is continuously performed from the initialization state. In the production mode (normal production mode) different from the production mode of the count mode, the first production pattern 211 is removed and the pattern 226 is fixed and stopped. Also, if the count mode is not passed, the 550th lost symbol is different from the special lost symbol (first special lost symbol) in the count mode described above (second special lost symbol, chance period fixed symbol, "367 ”).

FIG. 53(b) shows the execution scene of the variable display next to FIG. 53(a). In other words, this is the 551st variable display from the initialization state. At the center of the display screen, as the transition mode notification effect 233, a second chance period notification effect 233b indicating that the game state has shifted to the chance period is displayed in a large size. The transition mode notification effect (first chance period notification effect 233a) executed via the count mode and the transition mode notification effect (second chance period notification effect 233b) executed without going through the count mode are The display mode is different. In the upper left part of the display screen, the production pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and in the lower right part of the display screen, a shooting direction notification part 230 for notifying that the game ball is to be shot to the right game area to play the game is displayed. be.

In addition, although illustration is omitted, there is a super special mode and a special mode as a performance mode that is set when a predetermined condition is established (specifically, after the big hit is finished). In this super special mode, in the normal state (low base state, normal production mode, first specific state), when a special figure 1 big win A or a special figure 1 big win B relatively advantageous to the player is achieved, the big win is performed. It is a production mode (super special mode) set after the end of the game, and in the super special mode, the game state is set to the first time saving state (time saving number of times 50 or 90 times, second specific state). In addition, in the normal state (low base state, normal production mode), the special mode is a production mode (super special mode), and in the super special mode, the game state is set to the first time saving state (time saving number of times 5 times, second specific state). That is, the super special mode has a large number of times of time saving, whereas the special mode has a small number of times of time saving, so that the super special mode has a higher possibility of generating another big hit during the time saving state than the special mode. Therefore, the super special mode is more advantageous for the player than the special mode.

In addition, in both of these super special mode (second count effect) and special mode (second count effect), a remaining period display section showing the remaining period of the effect mode (time saving state, high base state) (Second Remaining Period Display Section) is provided (for example, a display such as "10 times remaining"). Then, in any effect mode, the remaining period (remaining number of times) displayed on the remaining period display section is subtracted each time the variable display is executed, and the remaining period (remaining number of times) is "0 (specific value)". When it becomes, the production mode is ended and the normal production mode is entered. The game state in the normal production mode is a low base state. That is, the advantageous game state (high base state) shifts to the disadvantageous game state (low base state). These super special mode, special mode, and normal production mode have at least one of the display mode of the background image displayed on the display screen, the display mode of the production pattern, the type of advance notice production, the type of ready-to-win production, and the like. different.

Next, using FIGS. 54 and 55, remaining period effect determination processing ( S4507) will be explained. In this embodiment, three types (plurality of) remaining period notification effects with different display modes are provided as game effects for informing the remaining period until the chance period. One of them is the aforementioned count mode (third notification effect, first count effect, third remaining period notification effect). Since the count mode has been described above, a detailed description is omitted, and the first notification effect (first remaining period notification effect) and the second notification effect (second remaining period notification effect) will be mainly described here.

In the remaining period effect determination processing (S4507), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the effect symbol to be executed from now on is out fluctuation (off, non-specific result, result of special symbol propriety determination is off) (S5001). In S5001, if it is determined that it is not a deviation variation, that is, a big hit variation (specific result, special symbol success or failure determination result is a big hit) (NO in S5001), the count value (value) of the chance counter described later is set to "0" Reset (S5006), reset the count value (value) of the notification counter to "0" (S5007), and finish the process.

At S5001, when it is determined that it is an off variation (YES at S5001), then it is determined whether or not the current game state (production mode) is a chance period (S5002). In S5002, when it is determined that the current game state (production mode) is the chance period (YES in S5002), the process ends. Since this control process is a process of determining the effect of notifying the remaining period until the chance period in a state in which the chance period is not executed, the notification effect is not executed when the chance period has already been executed. .

If it is determined in S5002 that the current time is not the chance period (NO in S5002), 1 is added to the chance counter (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. The chance counter is a counter that counts the number of consecutive executions of loss variation, and is incremented by 1 each time a variation display of a performance symbol (special symbol) is performed. In addition, the chance counter executes the number of consecutive deviations from the end of the previous big win game. If the processing has been performed, the number of consecutive deviation fluctuations from power-on accompanied by the RAM clearing is counted. In addition, when the previous big hit information is not stored at the time of shipment from the factory, the number of times of consecutive loss fluctuations after the shipment from the factory is counted. In addition, the count value of the chance counter is backed up, and even if the power is turned off, it is stored and held for a predetermined period of time unless RAM clear processing is performed. The value of the chance counter when the power is turned off is restored, and after the power is turned on, the count continues to that value.

In S5004, it is determined whether or not the count mode is being executed as the current production mode. If it is determined in S5004 that the count mode is being executed (YES in S5004), the process ends. As described above, during execution of the count mode (first count effect, third remaining period notification effect, third notification effect), the chance period display unit 207 notifies the remaining period (remaining number of times 207a) until the chance period. Therefore, the first notification effect (first remaining period notification effect) and the second notification effect (second remaining period notification effect) are not executed. Therefore, when the count mode is executed before the execution (execution timing) of the first notification effect and/or the second notification effect, the first notification effect and/or the second notification effect are not executed. do.

It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, when the count mode is executed before the execution (execution timing) of the first notification effect, the first notification effect is not executed, and the second notification effect is not executed. may be executed at the timing at which the count mode is executed or at the timing at which the second notification effect is executed (100 variation from power-on). In the first notification effect, the fact that the remaining period until the chance period is relatively short is only indicated indirectly and roughly within the character display, so the remaining period until the chance period is indicated by the number of variable display times. When the count mode for clearly displaying (notifying) is executed, there is no significance in executing the first notification effect. Therefore, when the cant mode is executed first, the first notification effect is not executed even if the execution timing of the first notification effect comes.

On the other hand, as in the count mode, the second notification effect is a effect that clearly displays (notifies) the remaining period until the chance period by the number of times of fluctuation display, so even when the count mode is executed, the second notification effect It cannot be said that the significance of executing the notification effect is lost. Therefore, the second notification effect may be executed in duplicate with the count mode.

If it is determined in S5004 that the count mode is not being executed (NO in S5004), then it is determined whether the value of the chance counter is 1350 or more. Here, "the value of the chance counter is 1350" will be explained. When the value of the chance counter reaches 550 times, that is, when the previous big hit game ends (or the RAM is cleared, or the state where no big win has occurred) and the variation is continuously executed 550 times, the game state ( Production mode) shifts to the chance period (high base state, time saving state, second time saving state). Also, during the chance period, when the deviation variation is continuously executed 800 times, the game state (production mode) shifts to the normal state (low base state). That is, if the value of the chance counter is 1350, the deviation variation is executed continuously 1350 times, and the game state changes from the chance period (high base state, time saving state, second time saving state) to normal state (low base state) means to move to Since the chance period is set only once at the end of the previous big win game (or in a RAM clear state or in a state where no big win has occurred), when the chance period elapses, the remaining period notification performance is executed. no. Therefore, when it is determined that the value of the chance counter is 1350 or more (YES in S5005), the processing ends without setting the remaining period notification effect.

In S5005, if it is determined that the chance counter value is not 1350 or more (NO in S5005), that is, if it is determined that the chance period has not been set even once after the last big hit, then the chance counter value is 500 It is determined whether or not (first number of times) (S5008). If the value of the chance counter is 500, that is, if it is determined that the variation has been continuously performed 500 times since the end of the previous big win game (or the RAM clear state, or the state where no big win has occurred) (in S5008 YES), then it is determined whether or not the last big hit game information is stored (S5014). In S5014, if it is determined that the previous big hit information is stored (RAM is not cleared when the power is turned on this time) (YES in S5014), the count mode (first count effect, third remaining period notification effect, third 3 notification effect) is set (S5015), and the process ends. Thus, in this embodiment, execution of the count mode is executed with priority over the first notification effect and the second notification effect.

On the other hand, in S5014, if it is determined that the previous big hit game information is not stored (the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on this time, or the big hit has never occurred) (NO in S5014), S5009 Go to processing. Even if the deviation variation is executed 500 times in a row (when the value of the chance counter reaches 500), the count mode may or may not be executed. 1st information effect and/or 2nd information effect can be executed. In S5009, it is determined whether or not there was a big hit after turning on the power, that is, whether or not it was the first hit after turning on the power (S5009). In S5009, when it is determined that there was a big hit after turning on the power (YES in S5009), the process ends.

In this embodiment, the first notification effect and the second notification effect are executed only once after the power is turned on and before the chance period is executed for the purpose of improving the operation rate of the gaming machine after the game shop is opened. . Therefore, when a big hit occurs even once after the power is turned on, the first information effect and the second information effect are not executed unless the power is turned off. A player can play a game by judging whether or not the gaming machine has cleared the RAM (initialization processing) of the gaming machine by watching the first notification effect and/or the second notification effect. As a result, it is possible to add a capture element to the game machine and enhance the interest in the game. Further, instead of such a mode, the first notification effect and the second notification effect may be executed any number of times as long as the execution conditions are satisfied. Also, the first notification effect may be executed only once after the power is turned on and before execution of the chance period, and the second notification effect may be executed any number of times as long as the execution conditions are satisfied. In addition, in this embodiment, the last big win information storage means (first big win information storage means) for storing the previous big win information, and the post-power-on big win information storage means (second big win information storage means) for storing the big win information after the power is turned on. ), the information stored in the previous jackpot information storage means (first jackpot information storage means) is backed up, and the information stored in the jackpot information storage means (second jackpot information storage means) after the input is not backed up. .

In S5009, when it is determined that there is no big hit after turning on the power (NO in S5009), 1 is added to the notification counter (S5010), and it is determined whether the value of the notification counter is 50 (S5011). In S5011, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter is 50, ie, the variation has been performed continuously 50 times since the power was turned on (YES in S5011), the process proceeds to S5012. In S5012, it is determined whether the value of the chance counter is 400 or more (S5012), and if it is determined that the value of the chance counter is not 400 or more (NO in S5012), the process ends without executing the first notification effect. . In this way, in this embodiment, in a state in which no big hit has occurred since the power was turned on, when the loss variation is continuously executed 50 times (when the first condition and the first execution condition are satisfied), Also, if the period is a period in which the remaining period until the chance period is longer than the specific period (a period requiring more than 150 fluctuations), the first notification effect is not executed. In S5012, the value of the chance counter is 400 or more, that is, if it is determined that the number of remaining fluctuations until the chance period is within 150 times (special number) (YES in S5012), the first notification effect (the 1 remaining period notification effect) is set (the first notification effect execution command is set) (S5013), and the process ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the first notification effect only displays a predetermined notification character 421a and does not clearly display the remaining number of times (remaining fluctuation display number of times). , the first notification effect makes it possible to grasp that the chance period is approaching (not so far), but it is not possible to accurately grasp the remaining period. For example, the time when 50 times (first specific number of times) of consecutive deviation fluctuations are achieved after turning on the power may be the time when the remaining 140 fluctuations are required until the chance period, or the remaining 60 fluctuations until the chance period. It may be time to display. As a result, the creativity of the player is stimulated and the amusement of the game is heightened.

The value of the chance counter is backed up, but the value of the notification counter is not backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the value of the notification counter is erased (cleared), and after the power is turned on, counting starts again from the initial value (0).

If it is determined in S5011 that the value of the notification counter is not 50 (NO in S5011), then it is determined whether the value of the notification counter is 100 (S5016). In S5016, the value of the notification counter is 100, that is, if it is determined that the variation has been executed continuously 100 times after turning on the power (YES in S5016), set the second notification effect (second notification effect execution command ) (S5017), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5016 that the value of the report Kanta is not 100 (NO in S5016), the process ends. Thus, unlike the first notification effect, the second notification effect is always executed when the execution conditions (second condition, second notification effect) are established. Therefore, the execution condition of the second notification effect ( 2nd condition, 2nd execution condition, power-on and fluctuation is executed 100 times in succession), the possibility of execution of the notification effect is higher.

Also, the first notification effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the variable display when the execution condition is satisfied, and is executed only during the variable display. On the other hand, when the execution condition is established, the second notification effect is executed over a plurality of times of variable display until the chance period is executed (or until the big hit game is executed). Therefore, it is assumed that the second notification effect has a longer execution period than the first notification effect. In addition, the count mode (third notification effect) has the longest execution period and is set to the second number of times (50 times), and the second notification effect has the longest execution period and is set to the third number of times (450 times). It is Therefore, the execution period of the notification effect is set such that the second notification effect is the longest, the third notification effect is the second longest, and the execution period of the first notification effect is the shortest. As a result, the display modes of a plurality of remaining period notification effects (first notification effect, second notification effect, and third notification effect) are differentiated, and the execution periods thereof are also differentiated, so the effect modes of the remaining period notification effects It is possible to diversify the game and increase the interest in the game.

Next, the execution modes of the first notification effect and the second notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. In FIG. 56(a), in the normal state (low base state), the 49th first special symbol validity determination is executed from the power-on, and the variation display of the effect symbols is based on the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination. It shows a scene where As shown in FIG. 56(a), three first effect pending display areas 9c (first effect pending display portion) at the lower left of the display screen 7a are displayed with three first effect pending 9a (symbols of "O"). ing. This indicates that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol propriety determination random number) acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 . In addition, in the variable pattern display area 9e at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a slightly larger "O" pattern than the first effect holding 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Depending on the display mode of this variable pattern 9f, there is a possibility that the result of the currently executed variable display will result in a big win (stop display with a big win pattern).

FIG. 56(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 56(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 56(a). In addition, in FIG. 56(b), as a result of the variable display of FIG. 56(a), at least one of the three performance symbols is different from the other performance symbols. It shows that the result of the 49th fluctuation display is out from the input (the result of the first special symbol propriety judgment is out). FIG. 56(c) shows a scene where the next variable display of FIG. 56(b) is being executed. FIG. 56(c) shows a scene in which the first notification effect 241 (first remaining period notification effect) is executed at a predetermined timing of the 50th variation display (loss variation) after the power is turned on. .

The first notification effect 241 (first remaining period notification effect) displays a notification character 241a in a predetermined display mode in the lower right area of the display screen. If the first notification effect is executed in the 50th (first specific number of times) fluctuation display (disappearance fluctuation) after turning on the power, the number of remaining fluctuations must be within 150 times until the chance period (in the chance period in the remaining period It is shown to the player that it is within a close specific range (any of the remaining 1 to 150 times). In addition, the first notification effect only displays the notification character 241a and does not directly display the number of remaining fluctuations until the chance period. to continue. FIG. 56(d) shows the same variable display as in FIG. 56(c) (the 50th variable display after the power is turned on), and shows the ending scene of the variable display after a predetermined time has passed from FIG. 56(c). . Also, as shown in the figure, the first notification effect is displayed during the execution of the 50th variable display, and the display ends before the end of the variable display.

FIG. 56(e) shows that, in the normal state (low base state), the 100th special symbol validity determination is executed after the power is turned on, and the effect symbol variation display is performed based on the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination. It shows a scene where FIG. 56(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 56(e) in the same variable display as in FIG. 56(e). In addition, in FIG. 56(f), as a result of the variable display in FIG. The result of the 100th (second specific number of times) fluctuation display from the input is out (the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out), that is, the second condition (second execution condition) is established showing.

FIG. 57(g) shows the next variable display of FIG. 56(f). FIG. 57(g) shows a scene in which the second notification effect 243 (second remaining period notification effect) is executed at a predetermined timing of the 101st fluctuation display (loss fluctuation) after the power is turned on. . The second notification effect 243 (second remaining period notification effect) is executed in the lower right display area of the display screen, and a remaining number display section 243a for displaying the number of remaining variable display times until the chance period is provided. Specifically, "225 more times until the chance period" is displayed, indicating that the shift to the chance period occurs due to the 225 times more failure fluctuations continuing. FIG. 57(h) shows the same variable display as in FIG. 57(g) (the 101st variable display after the power is turned on), and shows the ending scene of the variable display after a predetermined time has passed since FIG. 57(g). In addition, as shown in the figure, the second notification effect is displayed from the start of the 101st variation display, and is continuously executed over a plurality of variations until the transition to the chance period as long as the deviation variation continues. be. When the variation display ends, the remaining number display section 243a displays "224 times left until the chance period", indicating that the transition to the chance period occurs due to the continuation of the 224 times missing variation.

FIG. 57(i) shows the next variable display of FIG. 57(h). FIG. 57(i) shows the 102nd variation display (loss variation) after the power is turned on, and the second notification effect 243 (second remaining period notification effect) is continuously executed. The remaining number of times display section 243a displays "224 times left until the chance period", indicating that the shift to the chance period occurs due to a continuation of the 224 times missed fluctuations. The remaining period (remaining number of times) of the remaining number of times display section 243a is subtracted at the timing when the variable display ends.

FIGS. 57(j) to 57(l) show other display modes such as the remaining period notification effect. Although illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, in addition to the image display device 7 (main display section, first display section), a sub display section 244 (sub display section, second display section) is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(j), the sub-display section 244 (sub-display section, second display section) displays a remaining number display section 243a showing the remaining number of fluctuations up to the chance period, and a fluctuation from power-on. A change number display section 243b indicating the number of times of display is displayed.

FIG. 57(k) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 57(j) in the same variable display as FIG. 57(j). FIG. 57(j) shows that by executing a specific second game effect 242 (super reach, reach effect) with relatively high jackpot reliability (than the specific first game effect), the display screen 7a and the sub-display It shows a scene where both display parts of the part 244 are used for the second game effect (super reach). The secondary display portion 244 displays the effect pattern and the predetermined character (star pattern) used for the second game effect 242 (super reach, reach effect). The display screen 7a displays a ready-to-win pattern 225 and characters (enemy character, friend character) used for ready-to-win effects.

FIG. 57(l) shows the ending scene of the variable display after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 57(k). Due to the end of the second game effect 242, the remaining number display section 243a and the variation number display section 243b are displayed again on the sub display section 244. FIG. In this way, the remaining number display section 243a and the variation number display section 243b are displayed over a plurality of variations until the transition to the chance period, but they are not always displayed. The frequency display section 243a and the variation frequency display section 243b may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect and increase the interest in the game.

[Other aspect 1]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a result of the first special symbol suitability determination, a mode in which there is no small hit is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Not only the second special symbol suitability determination, but also the result of the first special symbol suitability determination may have a small hit. In addition, as the small hit, a plurality of small hit types are provided, and when the small hit type passes through a specific area and becomes a big hit, a different game state (first time saving state or Second time saving state). Moreover, you may set the number of times of time saving to provide to different times.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the big win is achieved based on the execution of the first special symbol suitability determination in the normal state, the second time-saving state is not set as the game state after the big win game is finished. Instead of such a mode, when a big hit is achieved based on the execution of the first special symbol success/failure determination in the normal state (via a small win V or a direct hit of the big win), the game state after the end of the big win game is a big win. Either the first time saving state or the second time saving state may be set depending on the type. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit, depending on the type of the big win, there are cases where the state after the end of the big win game is set to the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. good too. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the small win type (big hit type) causes the big hit game to end after the first time saving state. , and may be set to the second time saving state. In addition, depending on the type of the big hit and the type of the small hit, the number of times of time saving with different lengths may be set.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first time saving state, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination becomes a big hit, the state shifts to the second time saving state, and the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination becomes a small hit. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the state is not shifted to the second time saving state (the first time saving state is continued). Changing to such a mode, in the first time-saving state, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, depending on the big hit type, after the big hit game is finished, set to the first time-saving state, There may be cases where the second time saving state is set. Also, in the first time-saving state, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the big hit game ends according to the small hit type (big hit type). It may be set to the first time saving state or set to the second time saving state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the second time-saving state, when a big hit is achieved, even when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit, the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination becomes a small hit. Even when the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the second time saving state is continued after the big winning game is finished (it does not fall to the first time saving state). Changing to such a mode, in the second time saving state, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit, depending on the big hit type, when setting after the big hit game end to the first time saving state, The second time saving state may be set (continued). Also, in the second time-saving state, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit and the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes a big hit, the big hit game ends according to the small hit type (big hit type). There may be a case where the latter is set to the first time saving state or a case of setting (continuing) to the second time saving state. Also, the normal state may be set.

[Other aspect 2]
Moreover, it is possible to set it as the following aspects as another aspect of an Example. In the first embodiment, the left-handed notification effect (first left-handed notification effect) shown in FIG. 44 is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 provided in the right game area. It is not limited to various modes. In another aspect 1, another ball entrance (general ball entrance 27 etc.) provided so as to be able to detect the game ball launched to the right game area (second launch area) and another gate are provided, A left-handed information effect (first left-handed information effect) may be executed based on the detection of the game ball. In addition, instead of the game ball detection means for detecting the game ball, an operation amount detection means for detecting the rotation amount (operation amount) of the shooting handle is provided, and the operation amount detection means detects the rotation amount (operation amount) by a predetermined amount ( 44 may be performed when it is detected that the amount corresponding to the right stroke has been reached.

[Other aspect 3]
In addition, in the first embodiment, even if the game state is a low base state (except during the big win game and the small win game), during the special state (during the variable display of the effect symbol related to the second special symbol), Although the shooting notification effect (left-handed notification effect) for instructing the left-hand shot is not executed, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the game state is a low base state (except during the big win game and during the small win game) and the left-hand shot notification prohibition flag is OFF, when the right-hand shot is detected, the first left-hand shot launch notification effect is executed. It shall be. When the game state is a low base state (except during the big win game and during the small win game) and the left hitting notification prohibition flag is ON, even if the right hitting is detected, the first left hitting shooting notification effect is performed. is not executed, and "another launch notification effect" may be executed. Various modes are conceivable as a display mode and an execution mode of this "other firing notification effect". For example, like the first left-handed shot notification effect, the player is instructed to hit left, but in a less conspicuous manner than the first left-handed shot notification effect (when the player is playing a left-handed game) It is possible to execute it in a manner that is difficult to recognize). For example, when "another firing notification effect" is displayed on the display screen 7a, it may be displayed in a smaller size so as to be less conspicuous than the first left-handed firing notification effect. It may be displayed on the screen, or may be displayed graphically without character display. In addition, while the first left-handed shot notification effect is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to be conspicuous to the player, the "other shot notification effect" is lit, blinked, or the like using a lamp or the like outside the display screen 7a. may be displayed in the form of

[Other aspect 4]
In addition, in the first embodiment, in the non-time saving state (low base state), when the big hit game is executed based on the execution of the second special symbol success/failure determination, the game state after the end of the big hit game is the time saving state ( Although the probability of being in the high base state) is assumed to be 100%, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The probability that the game state after the jackpot game ends will be the time saving state may be a predetermined probability less than 100%. In this case, in the non-time-saving state (low base state), the probability that the big-hit game is executed based on the execution of the second special symbol suitability determination and the game state after the big-hit game ends is the time-saving state. is set higher than the probability that a big hit game is executed based on execution of the second special symbol suitability determination in the time saving state (high base state) and the game state after the end of the big winning game is the time saving state. It is possible to In addition, it is possible to make the probability of being determined as a small hit by the second special symbol success/failure determination higher than the probability of being determined to be a small success by the first special symbol success/failure determination.

[others]
In the configuration of the gaming machine described above, "to perform the first game area launch notification based on the establishment of the specific condition" means that the first game area launch notification is performed at least after the specific condition is established. Furthermore, the first game area launch notification may be performed based on the establishment of another condition (for example, the launch area detection means detects right-handed hitting).
Further, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the "first game state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable start hole is a predetermined frequency" is a state in which the ball cannot be entered into the variable start hole, that is, the frequency of ball entry is 0. and a state in which it is very difficult to enter the ball and the ball hardly enters the variable starting port. Further, the "specific display mode" means, for example, a big win display mode or a small win display mode. A plurality of different display modes may be provided for each of the big win display mode and the small win display mode.

In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, "when the special game is executed based on the ball entering the variable starting hole, the special game is executed based on the ball entering the starting hole, It is possible that the game state after the end of the special game is highly likely to be set to the second game state. Also, it may be stated that "the possibility that the special game will be executed based on the ball entering the variable starting hole is higher than the possibility that the special game will be executed based on the ball entering the starting hole". As a result, even after entering the first game state, if there is hold information acquired based on the ball entering the variable start port, a special game occurs again from the first game state, or the second game It is assumed that there is a relatively high probability that the condition will occur. Therefore, until the change display of the identification information related to the holding information indicating whether the special game or the second game state will occur again, the first game area launch notification is executed even if the first game state is reached. It is possible not to do so. Then, when the special game or the second game state occurs again, the first game area launch notification is not executed continuously, and when the special game or the second game state does not occur again (out) , it may be one that executes the first game area launch notification.

In addition, in the configuration of the game machine described above, "game ball detection means capable of placing the variable start opening in a second state where the possibility of a game ball entering is high based on the detection of the variable start opening or the game ball At least one of is placed at a position where a game ball launched into the first game area does not enter (not detected) or a position where it is difficult to enter (detect) a game ball launched into the first game area. It is possible to Thereby, in the first game state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the variable starting hole. In addition, "the game ball has a first firing strength and a second firing strength that is greater than the first firing strength as the firing strength of the game ball, and at least one of the above-described variable start opening or the game ball detection means is used in the game. When the game ball is launched with the second firing intensity of the area, it is placed in a position where it can be entered, and when the game ball is launched with the first launch intensity, it is placed at a position where it is impossible to enter (cannot be detected). .

In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, "when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state, the first game is displayed based on the identification information being changed and displayed a predetermined number of times in the second game state. state can be set, and when the second game state is set to the first game state, the first game area launch notification is not executed before the specific condition is established, and the first game area launch notification is not executed after the specific condition is established. It may be possible to execute the game area launch notification. In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, "when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state, the first game is displayed based on the identification information being changed and displayed a predetermined number of times in the second game state. state can be set, and when the game state is set from the second game state to the first game state, the first game area launch notification is executed even if the game ball is detected by the launch area detection means before the specific condition is established. Instead, after the specific condition is established, the first game area launch notification may be executed when the launch area detection means detects the game ball.

In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, "during the execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the hold information in the hold information storage means stored based on the entry of the ball into the variable start opening, the launch area detection means detects the game ball. Even if the game state at the time of detection is the first game state or the second game state, the first game area launch notification may not be executed.

In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, "the first game area launch detection means for detecting the launch to the first game area is provided, and in the second game state, the game ball is detected by the first game area launch detection means. When there is, the second game area launch notification indicating the launch to the second game area is executed, and in the first game state, during the variable display of the identification information related to the hold, the game ball is detected by the second game area launch detection means Even if there is detection, the first game area launch notification is not executed, and even if the game ball is detected by the first game area launch detection means, the second game area launch notification is not executed. . Also, "In the first game state, after the variable display of the identification information related to the hold information stored based on the entry of the ball into the variable start opening is completed, the game ball is detected by the second game area launch detection means. , the first game area launch notification is executed, and even if the game ball is detected by the first game area launch detection means, the second game area launch notification is not executed.

In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a first starting port into which a game ball can enter, a variable second starting port in which the possibility of a game ball entering can be changed, and a game to the first starting port First right/wrong determination means for executing a first right/wrong determination based on the entry of a ball, second right/wrong determination means for executing a second right/wrong determination based on the entry of a game ball into a second starting port, and a game A first variable ball entrance (first big prize opening) that can change between a state where a ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered, and an entrance where a game ball can be entered. a second variable ball entrance (second big prize opening) which is changeable between a ball possible state and a ball non-enterable state in which a game ball cannot be entered, and which has a specific area inside which a game ball can pass; a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state when the result of the first right/wrong judgment or the second right/wrong judgment is a win. may be

Set to a first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port is higher than that in the first game state. A game state setting means may be provided. Also, the first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starter is a predetermined frequency, where 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency". Further, as a result of the first right or wrong judgment or the second right or wrong judgment, it has a first specific result (big hit) and a second specific result (small hit), and the result of the first right or wrong judgment or the second right or wrong judgment is the first A game ball enters a second variable ball entrance that becomes a specific result, or the result of the first right/wrong judgment or the second right/wrong judgment becomes the second specific result and enters a ball-enterable state, and the game ball may be provided with a jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game when passes through a specific area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of openings of the first big prize opening or the second big winning opening in one round is one, but the number of openings of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is A plurality of rounds may be used, or different rounds may be opened.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the control process of digesting the second special figure reservation with priority over the first special figure reservation, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, but not limited to this, the first special figure reservation It may be a control process that preferentially digests the second special figure reservation, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and the first special reservation and the second special reservation are digested in order from the oldest one. It may be a control process, that is, a control process of digestion in order of entry (in order of memory).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, there are a big hit and a small win as a result of the special symbol success/failure determination. Although the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (a so-called 1-kind 2-kind game machine) capable of executing a jackpot game at both times, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game (a so-called type 1 game machine) in which a jackpot game can be executed only when the result of the special symbol hit/fail determination is a jackpot, or the result of the special symbol hit/fail determination is a jackpot. The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a probability setting means capable of setting a low probability state in which the possibility of winning is low and a high probability state in which the possibility of winning a big win is high. Moreover, the present invention is applicable to all types of gaming machines, and the present invention may be implemented by combining some or all of the above-described embodiments, other aspects, and other configurations.

[others]
(Reference Invention 1)
Reference invention 1 provides a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games through a variety of game features.

The game machine of Reference invention 1-1 invention is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable ball entrance which has a specific area inside and can be changed between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the suitability determination by the suitability determination means;
As a result of the success or failure determination, it has a first result (big hit) and a second result (small hit),
executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the result of the win/fail judgment is the first result (jackpot);
When the result of the success/failure determination is the second result (small hit), a sub-game is executed in which the variable ball entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball passes through the specific area in the sub-game. A gaming machine that executes the special game (jackpot game),
As the game state, a first game state (normal state), a second game state set to an advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first game state (first time-saving state: disadvantageous), and the first game A third game state (second time saving state: advantageous) that is set to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the state,
When the special game is executed, the second game state or the third game state can be set as the game state after the special game ends,
The second game state is to be shifted to the first game state (by ending the second game state and shifting to another game state) when the first end condition is satisfied,
The third game state is assumed to shift to the first game state (by ending the second game state and shifting to another game state) when the second end condition is satisfied,
The first end condition is that the variable display of the identification information is executed a preset number of times in the second gaming state, and before the variable display of the identification information is executed a preset number of times. The result of the success/failure determination is the second result (small hit), which is established when any of the above is established,
The second end condition is satisfied when the variable display of the identification information is performed a preset number of times in the third gaming state, and before the variable display of the identification information is performed a preset number of times. It is characterized in that it is not established if the second result (minor hit) is obtained.

According to such a gaming machine, as the execution mode of the special game, the execution mode in which the special game is executed when the result of the success/failure determination becomes the first result, and the result of the success/failure determination becomes the second result and the game ball and an execution mode in which a special game is executed by passing through a specific area. Also, as game states, at least a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, and a third game state that is also more advantageous than the first game state. have. Then, the second game state ends and shifts to the first game state based on the fact that the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times or the result of the success/failure determination becomes the second result. do. In addition, the third game state ends when the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times and shifts to the first game state. It shall not be shifted to the first game state based on the second result.

As a result, depending on the game state, the occurrence of the second result may be a condition for ending the advantageous state or may not be a condition for ending the advantageous state. Also, by providing a game with a variety of game characteristics, it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Also, the third game state and the second game state are game states with different end conditions. Further, the second game state is set such that the end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the third game state, and the third game state may be said to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state.

Further, it has a first right/wrong determination means for executing a first right/wrong determination and a second right/wrong determination means for executing a second right/wrong determination, and as a result of the first right/wrong determination, at least the first result (big hit) is obtained. It may have at least a first result (big hit) and a second result (small hit) as a result of the second success/failure determination. Further, as a result of the first suitability determination, the second result may or may not be provided.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
In the second game state, when the special game (big hit game) is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area, the result of the success/failure determination is the second result (small hit), the special The game state after the end of the game is set to a game state (second game state) having an advantageous state in the first period,
In the third game state, when the special game (big hit game) is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area as the result of the success/failure determination becomes the second result (small hit), the special The game state after the end of the game is set to a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state for the second period,
The first period and the second period are characterized by being different periods.

According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the success/failure determination in the second game state is the second result and the game ball passes through the specific area and the special game is executed, after the special game ends A game state having an advantageous state of the first period is set, and in the third game state, when the result of the success/failure determination becomes the second result and the game ball passes through the specific area, a special game is executed, After the end of the special game, a game state having an advantageous state for the second period is set. Also, the first period and the second period are different periods.

Thereby, when the special game is executed by passing through the specific area with the second result, depending on whether the game state at the time of the second result is the second game state or the third game state, The advantageous state set after the end of the special game becomes a different period. In addition, this gives the player a sense of tension and a sense of security depending on the game state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, by providing games with a variety of playability, it is possible to increase the interest in the games.

In addition, since the first period and the second period are different periods, the second game state in which the advantageous state is set in the first period and the third game state in which the advantageous state is set in the second period, have different advantages for

Also, the game state having the advantageous state in the first period may be the second game state, and the game state having the advantageous state in the second period may be the third game state.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
The second period is characterized by being longer than the first period.

According to such a gaming machine, the second period set when the special game is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area with the result of the success/failure determination being the second result in the third game state is , the period is longer than the first period set when the special game is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area with the result of the success/failure determination being the second result in the second game state. As a result, the third game state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game when shifting to the third game state.

Also, the second period is a period longer than the first period. Therefore, the third game state in which an advantageous state for a long period of time is set is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Alternatively, the first period may be longer than the second period. According to this aspect, the second game state in which the advantageous state for a long period of time is set becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state.

Further, the gaming machine of the fourth invention is the gaming machine of the first to third inventions,
The third game state is characterized in that it is set after the special game is completed when the result of the success/failure determination executed in the second game state becomes the first result and the special game is executed. and

According to such a gaming machine, the third game state is set after the special game ends when the result of the winning/failure determination executed in the second game state becomes the first result and the special game is executed. shall be As a result, the player expects that the result of the success/failure determination executed in the second game state will be the first result, and plays the game. In addition, by diversifying the mode of transition of the game state and providing a game with various game characteristics, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the third game state, when the result of the second success/failure determination executed in the second game state becomes the first result (jackpot) and a special game (jackpot game) is executed, after the jackpot game ends. It may be set.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4,
In the third game state, the result of the success/failure determination in the second game state becomes the second result (small hit) and the game ball passes through the specific area, so that the special game (big hit game) is executed. It is characterized in that it is not set after the end of the special game when it is set.

According to such a gaming machine, the third game state is when a special game is executed by passing through the specific area as a result of the success/failure determination in the second game state as the second result (minor win). shall not be set. As a result, in the second game state, the player expects the special game to be executed with the first result instead of passing through the second result, and enjoys the game interest. Increase. Also, by providing games with a variety of playability, it is possible to increase the interest in the games.

Further, the third game state is the special game (big hit game) in which the result of the success/failure determination in the first game state becomes the second result (small hit) and the game ball passes through the specific area. is executed, it is not set after the special game ends. That is, the third game state is set after the end of the special game only when the special game (big win game) is executed with the first result (big win) in the second game state.

Further, the gaming machine of the sixth invention is the gaming machine of the first to fifth inventions,
The third game state is not set after the end of the special game executed based on the execution of the success/failure determination in the first game state, and the success/failure determination is performed in the second game state. It is characterized in that it is set after the end of the special game executed based on.

According to such a gaming machine, after the special game based on the success/failure determination executed in the first game state is finished, the third game state is not set, and the special game based on the success/failure determination executed in the second game state is performed. After the game ends, a third game state is set. As a result, by executing the special game in the first game state, the game state shifts to the second game state, and by executing the special game in the second game state, the game state shifts to the third game state. diversify. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance amusement in games by providing games with a variety of game characteristics.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 1-1 to 1-6,
After the end of the special game executed based on the execution of the success/failure determination in the third game state, the first game state and the second game state are not set, and the third game state is set. is,
The third game state is characterized by being set to the first game state based on the termination of the second end condition.

According to such a gaming machine, after the special game based on the success/failure determination executed in the third game state is finished, the third game state is not set to either the first game state or the second game state. is set, and the third game state is set to the first game state based on the end of the second end condition. Thus, once the third game state is set, as long as the special game is executed in the third game state, the third game state continues, and when the second end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed to the first game state. will be transferred. As a result, a sense of security is given to the game state set after the end of the special game when shifting to the third game state, and a sense of tension is given to the fulfillment of the second end condition during the game in the third game state. , increase the interest in gaming.

Also, after the special game executed based on the execution of the success/failure determination in the third game state, the game state is set to the third game state. That is, when the special game is executed in the third game state, the third game state is continued.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-8 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 1-1 to 1-7,
In the first game state, the game state is set to the third game state without going through the special game based on executing the variable display of the identification information for a specific number of times. .

According to such a gaming machine, by executing the variable display of the identification information for a specific number of times in the first game state, the game state is changed to the third game state without executing the winning/failure determination and performing the special game. It shall be set to the game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition of the game state and enhance the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the amusement of the game.

Also, as another aspect,
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A variable starting port that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first mode,
base state setting means capable of setting a first base state (low base state) and a second base state (high base state) in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable starting hole is higher than that in the first base state;
a variable ball entrance which has a specific area inside and can be changed between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on the ball entering the variable starting port;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the suitability determination by the suitability determination means;
As a result of the success or failure determination, it has a first result (big hit) and a second result (small hit),
executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the result of the win/fail judgment is the first result (jackpot);
When the result of the success/failure determination is the second result (small hit), a sub-game is executed in which the variable ball entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered, and the game ball passes through the specific area in the sub-game. A gaming machine that executes the special game (jackpot game),
As game states, a first game state (normal state) set to the first base state, a second game state set to the second base state (first short-time state: unfavorable), and the second base Has a third gaming state (second time saving state: advantageous) set in the state,
When the special game is executed, the second game state or the third game state can be set as the game state after the special game ends,
When the result of the success/failure determination in the second game state becomes the second result, the game state is set to the first base state, the sub-game is executed in the first base state, and the game is played in the sub-game. When the ball passes through the specific area, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the first base state,
When the result of the success/failure determination in the third game state becomes the second result, the game state remains the second base state and the sub-game is executed in the second base state, and in the sub-game When the game ball passes through the specific area, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the second base state,
The second base state that is set after the special game is completed when the game ball passes through the specific region in the first base state and when the game ball passes through the specific region in the second base state. may be characterized in that the set periods (execution periods) of are different.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area in the first base state, the game ball is set after the special game is completed, rather than when the game ball passes through the specific area in the second base state. The setting period (execution period) of the second base state may be long.

(Reference Invention 2)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter; a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable ball entrance which has a specific area inside and can be changed between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a first right/wrong determination means for executing a first right/wrong determination based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a second right/wrong determination means for executing a second right/wrong determination based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a first identification information display means for variably displaying the first identification information based on the result of the suitability determination by the first suitability determination means;
a second identification information display means for variably displaying the second identification information based on the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means;
As a result of the first propriety determination, at least it has a first specific result (big hit),
As a result of the second success/failure determination, having at least a first specific result (big hit) and a second specific result (small hit),
When the result of the first success/failure determination is the first specific result (big hit), when the result of the second success/failure determination is the first specified result (big hit), and the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second specific result (small hit) and executes a sub-game in which the variable ball entrance is in a state where it can be entered, and when the game ball passes through the specific area in the sub-game, the player A gaming machine that executes an advantageous special game (jackpot game),
As the game state, the first game state (normal state), the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (first time saving state: disadvantageous), and the player more than the second game state Has an advantageous third gaming state (second time saving state: advantageous),
When the special game is executed, the second game state or the third game state can be set as the game state after the special game ends,
Said second game state shall be shifted to said first game state when the first termination condition is established,
Said third game state shall be shifted to said first game state when a second termination condition is satisfied,
The first end condition is that, in the second gaming state, the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is executed a preset number of times, and the first identification information or the second identification information Established when any of the second specified result (small hit) is established before the variable display of the identification information is executed a preset number of times,
The second end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information a preset number of times in the third gaming state, and the first identification information or the second identification information 2. It is characterized in that it is not established if the second specified result (minor win) is obtained before the variable display of the identification information is executed a preset number of times.

According to such a gaming machine, the first right/wrong determination means for executing the first right/wrong determination and the second right/wrong determination means for executing the second right/wrong determination are provided, and as a result of the first right/wrong determination, at least It has a first identification result, and has at least a first identification result and a second identification result as a result of the second yes/no determination. As the execution mode of the special game, the execution mode in which the special game is executed when the result of the first success/failure determination becomes the first specified result, and the special game is executed when the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the first specified result. and an execution mode in which a special game is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area with the result of the second success/failure determination as the second specific result.

Also, as game states, at least a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, and a third game state that is also more advantageous than the first game state. have. The second game state is based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is executed a predetermined number of times, or the result of the second success/failure determination is the second specific result. to end and shift to the first game state. In addition, the third game state is terminated based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is executed a predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the first game state, and the state is changed to the second game state. Secondly, the transition to the first game state is not made based on the fact that the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second specified result.

As a result, depending on the game state, the occurrence of the second specified result may be a condition for ending the advantageous state, or may not be a condition for ending the advantageous state. It gives a feeling and enhances amusement interest. Also, by providing games with a variety of playability, it is possible to increase the interest in the games.

Also, the third game state and the second game state are game states with different end conditions. Further, the second game state is set such that the end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the third game state, and the third game state may be said to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state.

Further, it has a first right/wrong determination means for executing a first right/wrong determination and a second right/wrong determination means for executing a second right/wrong determination, and at least a first specific result (big hit) as a result of the first right/wrong determination. and a second specific result (small hit), and as a result of the second right/wrong determination, at least the first specific result (big hit) and the second specific result (small hit). good. Moreover, it is good also as what does not have a 2nd specific result as a result of 1st right/wrong determination.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
In the second game state, when the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second specific result (small hit) and the game ball passes through the specific area, and the special game (big hit game) is executed. , the game state after the end of the special game is set to a game state (second game state) having an advantageous state in the first period,
In the third game state, when the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second specific result (small hit) and the game ball passes through the specific area, and the special game (big hit game) is executed. , the game state after the end of the special game is set to a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state in the second period,
The first period and the second period are characterized by being different periods.

According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the second success/failure determination in the second game state becomes the second specific result and the game ball passes through the specific region, and a special game is executed, the special A game state having an advantageous state in a first period is set after the game is over, and a special game is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area with the result of the second success/failure determination in the third game state as the second specific result. If so, a game state having an advantageous state for the second period is set after the end of the special game. Also, the first period and the second period are different periods.

Thereby, when the special game is executed by passing through the specific area with the second specific result, it is determined whether the game state at the time of the second specific result is the second game state or the third game state. Depending on the period, the advantageous state set after the end of the special game is different. In addition, this gives the player a sense of tension and a sense of security depending on the game state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, by providing games with a variety of playability, it is possible to increase the interest in the games.

In addition, since the first period and the second period are different periods, the second game state in which the advantageous state is set in the first period and the third game state in which the advantageous state is set in the second period, have different advantages for

Also, the game state having the advantageous state in the first period may be the second game state, and the game state having the advantageous state in the second period may be the third game state.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2,
The second period is characterized by being longer than the first period.

According to such a gaming machine, in the third game state, the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second specified result, and the game ball passes through the specified area, so that the special game is executed. The second period is longer than the first period, which is set when a special game is executed by passing the game ball through the specific region with the result of the second success/failure determination being the second specific result in the second game state. regarded as a long period of time. As a result, the third game state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game when shifting to the third game state.

Also, the second period is a period longer than the first period. Therefore, the third game state in which an advantageous state for a long period of time is set is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Alternatively, the first period may be longer than the second period. According to this aspect, the second game state in which the advantageous state for a long period of time is set becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
As the second specified result, at least a first second specified result (first small win) and a second second specified result (second small win),
In the second game state, the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the first second specific result (small hit 2) and the game ball passes through the specific area, so that the special game (big hit game) When executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a game state (second game state) having an advantageous state in the first period,
In the third game state, the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the first second specific result (small hit 2) and the game ball passes through the specific area, so that the special game (big hit game) When executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state of the second period,
The first period and the second period are characterized by being different periods.

According to such a gaming machine, as the second specified result, it has at least a first second specified result (first small win) and a second second specified result (second small win). Then, in the second game state, when the result of the second correctness determination becomes the first second specific result and the game ball passes through the specific area, and the special game is executed, after the special game ends, the second A game state (second game state) having an advantageous state for one period is set, and in the third game state, the result of the second right/fail judgment becomes the first second specific result and the game ball passes through the specific area. When the special game is executed at , a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state of the second period is set after the special game is finished. Also, the first period and the second period are different periods.

Thereby, when the special game is executed by passing through the specific area with the first second specific result, the game state when the first second specific result is obtained is the second game state. or the third game state, the advantageous state set after the end of the special game is different. In addition, this gives the player a sense of tension and a sense of security depending on the game state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, by providing games with a variety of playability, it is possible to increase the interest in the games.

In addition, since the first period and the second period are different periods, the second game state in which the advantageous state is set in the first period and the third game state in which the advantageous state is set in the second period, have different advantages for In addition, since the period of the advantageous state to be given when the same first second specific result (minor win) is obtained in the second game state and the third game state is different, the first game state in which game state It becomes important for the player whether the second specified result (minor win) is obtained, and the interest in the game is enhanced. In addition, it becomes possible to diversify the playability.

Also, the game state having the advantageous state in the first period may be the second game state, and the game state having the advantageous state in the second period may be the third game state. According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the second success/failure determination in the second game state becomes the first second specific result and the game ball passes through the specific area, a special game is executed. , After the end of the special game, the second game state is set (continuation of the second game state), and in the third game state, the result of the second win-or-fail judgment becomes the first second specific result, and the game ball moves through the specific area When the special game is executed by passing, the third game state is set after the special game ends (continuation of the third game state).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4,
The second period is characterized by being longer than the first period.

According to such a gaming machine, it is set when the special game is executed by the game ball passing through the specific region as the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the first second specific result in the third game state. The second period is set when a special game is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area with the result of the second success/failure determination being the first second specific result in the second game state. The period is longer than the first period. As a result, the third game state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game when shifting to the third game state.

Also, the second period is a period longer than the first period. Therefore, the third game state in which an advantageous state for a long period of time is set is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Alternatively, the first period may be longer than the second period. According to this aspect, the second game state in which the advantageous state for a long period of time is set becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 or Reference Invention 2-5,
In the second game state, the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second second specific result (small hit 3) and the game ball passes through the specific area, so that the special game (big hit game) When executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state of the third period,
In the third game state, the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second second specific result (small hit 2) and the game ball passes through the specific area, so that the special game (big hit game) When executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state of the third period.

According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the second success/failure determination in the second game state becomes the second second specified result and the game ball passes through the specified area, a special game is executed. , a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state of the third period is set after the end of the special game, and the result of the second win-or-fail judgment in the third game state becomes the second second specified result, and the game ball When the special game is executed by passing through the specific area, a game state (third game state) having an advantageous state of the third period is set after the special game ends.

That is, when the result of the second right or wrong judgment in the second game state becomes the second second specific result and the game ball passes through the specific area, the result of the second right or wrong judgment in the third game state is the second The game state set after the end of the special game is set to the same game state as when the game ball passes through the specific area as the second specific result. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition of the game state and enhance the interest in the game.

Further, the third period may be the same period as the first period, the third period may be the same period as the second period, or the third period may be the same period as the first period or the second period. It may be for different time periods. Also, the third period may be longer than the first period and the second period. By setting the third period to be a long period, when the result of the second correctness determination in the second game state becomes the second second specific result and the game ball passes through the specific area, in the third game state 2. In the case where the result of the success/failure determination is the second second specified result and the game ball passes through the specified area, after the special game ends, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state for the player. Further, this makes it possible to improve the game amusement when the result of the second success/failure determination becomes the second second specification result and the game ball passes through the specific area.

In addition, when the second specified result (small hit) is obtained, a different period is given depending on the game state (second game state or third game state) as a period of advantageous state given after the special game is finished. Second identification result (first second identification result) and second identification result (second second identification result) in which the same period is given even if the game state (second game state or third game state) is different ) and As a result, attention is paid to the game state to be executed and the type of the second specified result (minor win) that has occurred, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In addition, it becomes possible to diversify the playability.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-6,
As the second identification result, at least a third second identification result (small hit 1),
The result of the second right/wrong judgment (second right/wrong judgment) executed in the second gaming state becomes the third second specific result (small hit 3), and the game ball passes through the specific area. When the special game (jackpot game) is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the third game state.

Such a gaming machine has at least the third specified result as the second specified result. Then, in the second game state, when the result of the second correctness determination becomes the third second specific result and the game ball passes through the specific area and the special game is executed, after the special game ends, the second 3 game state is set. As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to improve the game interest when the game ball passes through the specific area as the third second specific result. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the mode of transition of the game state and enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-8 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-7,
In the first game state, the game state is set to the third game state without going through the special game based on executing the variable display of the identification information for a specific number of times. .

According to such a gaming machine, by executing the variable display of the identification information for a specific number of times in the first game state, the game state is changed to the third game state without executing the winning/failure determination and performing the special game. It shall be set to the game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition of the game state and enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, when the result of the second right/wrong determination (second special symbol right/wrong determination) is the second specific result (small hit), at least the first second specific result and the second and a third second identification result, and the configuration described above may be adopted.

In addition, when the result of the first success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) is the second specified result (small hit), the second specified result has the fourth second specified result, and the first When a special game (big hit game) is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area with the result of the first success/failure determination executed in the gaming state becoming the fourth second specific result (small hit 4), The game state after the end of the special game may be set to the third game state. That is, in the first game state (normal state, low base state, non-time saving state), when passing through a specific area (V passing) via a small hit and becoming a big hit, the second game state (first time saving state) Instead, the game state may be shifted to the third game state.

In addition, the probability (possibility) that the result of the first success/failure determination (in the first gaming state) is the second specific result (minor hit) is the second success/failure determination (in the second gaming state (third gaming state)) result is set lower than the probability (possibility) of the second specific result (minor hit). Therefore, in the first game state, the possibility of passing the specific area (V passing) via the small hit and becoming a big hit is that in the second game state and the third game state, the specific area passing (V passing) via the small hit It is set lower than the possibility of winning the jackpot. Therefore, when such a rare (low possibility) itself occurs, the player is given a privilege of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player. As a result, in the first game state, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game when a big win is achieved by passing through the specific area (V passing) via a small win as a result of the first win/fail determination.

Alternatively, in the case where the result of the first right/wrong determination is the second identification result, at least the fourth second identification result and the fifth second identification result are used as the second identification result. have a result and Then, the result of the first success/failure determination executed in the first game state becomes the fourth second specified result (small win 4), and the special game (big win game) is executed by the game ball passing through the specified area. If so, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the third game state, and the result of the first success/failure determination executed in the first game state is the fifth second specific result (small win 5). When a special game (jackpot game) is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area, the game state after the special game is finished may be set to the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. Further, when the result of the first right/wrong determination is the second identification result, the second identification result may have a sixth second identification result.

In addition, in the third game state (second time saving state), the result of the success/failure determination executed in the second game state (first time saving state) becomes the first specific result (jackpot) and the special game (jackpot game) It may be characterized in that, when executed, it is set after the special game ends.

In addition, the third game state is when a special game (big hit game) is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area as the result of the win/fail determination in the second game state becomes the second specific result (small hit). In addition, it may be characterized in that it is not set after the special game ends.

In addition, in the third game state, the result of the success/failure determination in the first game state (normal state) is the second specific result (small hit), and the game ball passes through the specific area, so that a special game (big hit game) is performed. When executed, it is not set after the special game ends. That is, the third game state may be set after the special game ends only when the special game (jackpot game) is executed with the first specified result (big win) in the second game state.

Further, the third game state is not set after the end of the special game executed based on the execution of the success/failure determination in the first game state, and is executed based on the execution of the success/failure determination in the second game state. It may be set after the end of the special game played.

Further, after the end of the special game executed based on the execution of the winning/failure determination in the third game state, the second game state is not set, and the first game state is set based on the end of the second end condition. It may be characterized by being

Also, after the special game executed based on the execution of the success/failure determination in the third game state, the game state is set to the third game state. That is, when the special game is executed in the third game state, the third game state is continued.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the amusement of the game.

(Reference invention 3)
In the conventional gaming machine, while the interest in the game is enhanced by various game effects, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered if the game effect is complicated or difficult for the player to understand. there were.

The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a game machine that provides game effects in various forms of effects, provides game effects that are easy for the player to understand, and enhances the interest in the game. It is something to do.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which, when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specified result, a special notification effect is executed and the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state. and
As the specified result, having a first specified result (big hit, first result) and a second specified result (small hit, second result),
As the special game, it has a first special game (big hit game) and a second special game (small hit game),
The special notification effect includes a first special notification effect and an additional notification effect (remaining time display) displayed in addition to the first special notification effect,
The first special game is a special game with a larger profit that can be obtained than the second special game,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specified result, the first special notification effect is executed and the first special game is executed,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specified result, the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect are executed, and the second special game is executed,
The first special game is executed after the second special game by establishing a specific condition during the execution of the first special information effect and the additional information effect as a result of the second specified result. Characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, the specified result has the first specified result and the second specified result, and the special game has the first special game and the second special game. In addition, when the first specified result is obtained, the first special notification effect is executed and the first special game is executed, and when the second specified result is obtained, the same first special notification effect and additional notification effect as in the first special game are executed. At the same time, the second special game is executed. Then, the first special game is executed after the second special game by establishing a specific condition during the execution of the first special information effect and the additional information effect.

As a result, in both cases of executing the first special game after passing through the first specified result and executing the first special game after passing through the second specified result and establishing the specified condition, the common second By executing the 1 special notification effect, the player can execute the first special game triggered by any of them without a sense of incompatibility. Further, in the case of executing the first special game through the second specified result and establishing the specific condition, unlike the case of executing the first special game through the first specified result, in addition to the first special notification effect By executing the additional notification effect with the player, it is also possible for the player to recognize the difference between the first special games with different motives.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
It is characterized by not executing the first special game after the second special game when the second specific result is obtained and the specific condition is not established during the execution of the first special information effect and the additional information effect. and

According to such a gaming machine, if the specific condition is not established during the execution of the first special information effect and the additional information effect, the game ends without executing the first special game after the second special game. As a result, during the execution of the first special notification performance and the additional notification performance, the players are made to expect whether or not the specific condition is established, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Also, the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific result (small hit), and the specific condition is established (passes through the specific area) during the execution of the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect, After the second special game (small winning game), the first special game (big winning game) is executed without changing the identification information (without intervening). In addition, when the result of the variable display of the identification information is the second specific result (minor hit) and the specific condition is not established (passes through the specific area) during the execution of the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect. After the second special game, the identification information is variably displayed without executing the first special game (without intervening).

In addition, the result of the variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and the variable display of the identification information are the specific results. A special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state may be provided. The predetermined condition may be established based on the ball entering the starting hole. Further, it comprises a right/wrong determination means for performing a right/wrong determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the right/wrong determination result. The game machine may stop and display the identification information in a specific manner to execute a special game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2,
The second special game is being executed while the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect that are executed as the second specified result are being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second specific result is obtained and the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect are executed, the second special notification effect and the additional notification effect are executed. A special game is in progress. As a result, the player can execute a more advantageous first special game by establishing a specific condition during the execution of the second special game, and heighten expectations during the execution of the second special game. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 or Reference Invention 3-3,
As the variable ball entrance, a special variable ball entrance (second variable ball entrance) having a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided,
The specific condition is established when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the first special information effect and the additional information effect which are executed as the second specific result. It is.

According to such a gaming machine, as a variable ball entrance, it has a special variable ball entrance having a specific area through which a game ball can pass. The specific condition is established by the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect. Thus, during execution of the first special notification performance and the additional notification performance, attention is paid to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4,
The additional notification effect is a remaining time display effect indicating the passage of a predetermined time,
The first special game is executed by establishing the specific condition before the remaining time displayed in the remaining time display effect runs out.

According to such a gaming machine, the additional notification effect displayed together with the first special notification effect is the remaining time display effect indicating the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, the first special game is executed by establishing a specific condition before the remaining time displayed in the remaining time display effect in the additional notification effect runs out. As a result, the player can shoot the game ball in order to satisfy the specific condition before the remaining time in the additional notification effect runs out (becomes "0") in the display effect. In addition, the player can be notified of the game ball shooting timing (that the game ball should be shot), so that the player can easily understand the playability.

In addition, in the case of ``executing the first special game after the second special game by establishing the specific condition during execution of the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect with the second specific result''. , the first special notification effect is not executed when the first special game is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from becoming redundant.

In addition, it has a special game effect (jackpot game effect, round effect) indicating that the first special game is being executed,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specified result, the first special notification effect is executed and the first special game is executed, and the special game effect is executed during the execution of the first special game,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specified result, the first special notification effect and the additional notification effect are executed, and the second special game is executed,
As a second specific result, the first special game is executed after the second special game by establishing the specific condition during the execution of the first special information effect and the additional information effect, and the first special game A special game effect shall be executed during execution of the game.
As a result, the player can execute the first special game (jackpot game) triggered by any event without any sense of incongruity.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 3, it is possible to provide game performances of various presentation modes, to provide game performances that are easy for the player to understand, and to provide a gaming machine with high game interest.

(Reference Invention 4)
In a conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail decision is made with a predetermined probability of a big win, and symbols are variably displayed, and when the result of the win/fail decision is a big win, the symbols are stopped and displayed as the big win symbols, and the big win is displayed. There is a game that executes a jackpot game to open a prize-winning slot. In addition, a game effect (ready effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the pattern, and the possibility that the result of the win/loss determination will be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit pattern and the display is stopped. It showed the possibility of doing (jackpot reliability) (for example, JP-A-10-57583).

In addition, as game effects (reach effects, character effects, etc.), a plurality of game effects with different execution modes are provided, and different game effects indicate different degrees of reliability for big hits. As a result, the player's interest in the game is heightened when the game performance with high reliability of the big win is executed, and the interest in the game is further heightened when the big win is advantageous. In addition, as winning games, a plurality of types of winning games having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, and when an advantageous winning game is executed, the interest in the game is enhanced. In addition, by having a plurality of presentation modes with different display modes and executing different presentation modes depending on the game state, the presentation effect is enhanced and boredom of the game is prevented.

In the above-described gaming machine, although various game effects and effects modes are executed, the display modes are merely different, and the game is not yet more interesting. Reference invention 4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a game machine that provides game effects in various modes and enhances game interest by means of new effect modes.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
game state setting means for setting a game state;
a game effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
As the game state, a first specific state (normal state, low base state), and a second specific state (time saving state, high base state) different from the first specific state,
As the game performance,
and a first count effect, which is an effect executed in the first specific state, and has a first remaining time display unit that indicates the remaining time during which the first specific state is executed by the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. , (play time transition effect, count mode, first countdown effect)
a second count effect, which is an effect executed in the second specific state, and which has a second remaining time display unit that indicates the remaining time during which the second specific state is executed by the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner; , (Time saving production, special mode, super special mode, second countdown production),
In the case where the first count effect is executed, when the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display unit disappears by executing the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times (50 times) ( when the specific value (0) is reached), the game state shifts from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state;
In the case where the second count effect is executed, when the remaining period displayed on the second remaining period display unit disappears by executing the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times, the game state changes to It is characterized in that the game state is shifted from the second specific state to a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second specific state.

According to such a gaming machine, as game states, the first specific state and the second specific state different from the first specific state are provided, and in the first specific state, the first specific state having the first remaining period display section is displayed. A count effect is executed, and in a second specific state, a second count effect having a second remaining period display part is executed. When the remaining period of the first count effect runs out, the game state shifts from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous than the first specific state, and when the remaining period of the second count effect runs out, the game state changes. The second specific state is shifted to a game state more disadvantageous than the second specific state. As a result, the count performance can be executed in different game states, and depending on the game state in which the count performance is executed, when the remaining period runs out, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state or when the game state is shifted to a disadvantageous game state. There is. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the first count effect in the first specific state, the game state changes from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state. number of fluctuations) and a predetermined number of fluctuations in which the game state shifts from the second specific state to a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second specific state in the second count effect in the second specific state. (Second number of fluctuations) may be the same number of times or may be different numbers of times. Further, the display modes (effect modes) of the first count effect and the second count effect may be different display modes or may be the same display mode.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
Having a hit (specific result) and a miss as a result of the variable display of the identification information,
When the first count effect is executed, the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display unit is reduced by the result of the variable display of the identification information being out of sequence a predetermined number of times. When it disappears, the game state shifts from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state,
When the second count effect is executed, the remaining period displayed on the second remaining period display unit is shortened by the result of the variable display of the identification information failing a predetermined number of times consecutively. When the second specific state disappears, the game state shifts from the second specific state to a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second specific state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first count effect, the result of the variable display of the identification information is consecutively lost for a predetermined number of times, so that the remaining period disappears and the game state becomes an advantageous game state. Then, in the second count effect, the result of the variable display of the identification information is consecutively lost for a predetermined number of times, so that the remaining period disappears and the game state shifts to a disadvantageous game state. As a result, every time the variable display of the identification information is executed, it is possible to anticipate a change in the game state and increase the interest in the game. The predetermined number of times in the first count effect and the predetermined number of times in the second count effect may be the same or different.

In addition, in the first count effect in the first specific state, the game state changes from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state. The number of fluctuations in the first consecutive failure) and the second count effect in the second specific state, the game state is predetermined to shift from the second specific state to a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second specific state The obtained number of continuous out-of-variation fluctuations (second number of out-of-sequence fluctuations) may be the same number of times or may be different number of times. Also, the number of times of the first fluctuation and the number of times of the first continuous deviation fluctuation are the same number of times (meaning the same thing). In addition, the number of times of the second variation and the number of times of the second continuous deviation are the same number of times (meaning the same thing).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2,
A variable ball entrance (second starting opening, variable starting opening) that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first mode,
a ball-entering frequency setting means capable of setting a first frequency state in which the frequency of ball-entering the variable entrance is the first frequency, and a second frequency state in which the frequency of ball-entering the variable entrance is higher than the first frequency state; with
The first specific state is the first frequency state, and the second specific state is the second frequency state.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first frequency state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable ball opening is the first frequency, and a second frequency state in which the frequency of ball entry is higher than the first frequency state. The first specified state is the first frequency state, and the second specified state is the second frequency state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the patterns of changes in the game state accompanying the count effect, and to increase the interest in the game in the count effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3,
When the first count effect is executed, the game state to be shifted from the first specific state is the second frequency state,
When the second count effect is executed, the game state to be shifted from the second specific state is the first frequency state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state to be shifted in the first count effect is the second frequency state, and the game state to be shifted in the second count effect is the first frequency state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the patterns of changes in the game state accompanying the count effect, and to increase the interest in the game in the count effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-4,
As the identification information, first display identification information (normal effect pattern, first effect pattern) and second display identification information (advantageous state effect pattern, second effect pattern),
The second display identification information has a display mode different from that of the first display identification information, and identification information used in a game state more advantageous to the player than in a game state in which the first display identification information is used. and
As the game presentation, the first display identification information indicating predetermined pattern information (numeric information) is changed to the second display identification information without changing from the pattern information (numeric information) indicated by the first display identification information. It has a production (design display mode change production),
In the first count effect, the first display identification information is variably displayed, and in the first count effect, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the first display identification information is stopped and displayed (determined stop). display), the rush effect is executed (accompanied by the next variable display),
A game state (second specific state) after shifting from the first specific state is characterized by displaying the second display identification information in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information includes the first display identification information, and the second display, which is different in display mode from the first display identification information and is used in a game state more advantageous than the first display identification information. and identification information. In addition, as a game effect, there is a rush effect in which the first display identification information indicating predetermined pattern information is changed to the second display identification information without changing from the pattern information indicated by the first display identification information. In the first count performance, the first display identification information is variably displayed, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the rush performance is executed, and in the game state after transition, the second display identification information is variably displayed. As a result, in accordance with the change in the game state based on the count performance, the rush performance is executed to change the display mode of the identification information, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5,
When the second count effect is executed, the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game state is changed from the second specific state to a more disadvantageous situation for the player than the second specific state. When shifting to a game state, the rush effect is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game state is changed by performing the variable display of the identification information for the predetermined number of times in the second count effect, the rush effect for changing the display mode of the identification information is not executed. . Thus, depending on the type of count effect to be executed, whether or not the rush effect is executed, that is, whether or not to change the display mode of the identification information is made different. Also, this makes it possible to diversify the effects based on the count effects and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the "plunging effect" of this example is the first display identification information (for example, "345") indicating predetermined pattern information, without changing from the pattern information (number information) indicated by the first display identification information. The second display identification information (for example, "345" with a different font (different color) from the first display identification information) is used. Instead of such a mode, when changing from the first display identification information to the second display identification information, the pattern information (numerical information) indicated by the display identification information may be changed. Specifically, first display identification information (for example, "345") indicating predetermined pattern information is replaced with second display identification information (for example, second display identification information) indicating different pattern information from the pattern information indicated by the first display identification information. It may be changed to "388" which is different from the 1 display identification information.

In addition, the "plunging effect" may be executed in a predetermined number of times (for example, the 550th time) of the variable display, or may be executed in a variable display (the 551st time) after the predetermined number of times (the 550th time) of the variable display. ), that is, the game state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state) after shifting from the first specific state (low base state) may be executed with the first variation display. Further, the first display identification information (for example, "345") indicating the predetermined pattern information is changed to the second display identification information (for example, the first display identification information) without changing from the pattern information indicated by the first display identification information. and "345" with a different font), the last stop pattern of the first specific state (low base state) (outgoing effect pattern, outgoing effect pattern combination), and the game state after transition (time saving state, first Time saving state, second time saving state) and the first stop pattern (outgoing effect pattern, outgoing effect pattern combination) indicate the same pattern information (for example, the display mode is different, but both are "345"). good. However, it is limited to the case where the result of the first special symbol propriety determination (result of fluctuation display of identification information) in the game state after the shift (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state) is out.

In addition, the "rush effect" and/or the "achievement effect" are changed from the predetermined number of times (550th time) of the next variable display (551st time), that is, from the first specific state (low base state). When it is executed in the first variation display in the later game state (time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state), in the first count effect, the predetermined number of times (550 times) fluctuation display ( Even if the continuous loss variation) is executed and the game state shifts from the first specific state to a more advantageous game state, the "rush effect" and/or the "achievement effect" may not be executed. That is, in the first count effect, when a predetermined number of times (550 times) of fluctuation display (consecutive loss fluctuation) is executed and the game state shifts from the first specific state to a more advantageous game state, "rush Effect” and/or “achievement effect” may or may not be executed.

If the "rush effect" and / or "achievement effect" is not executed, the game state shifts from the first specific state to a more advantageous game state, and the result of the first variation display of the identification information (special symbol suitability determination result) becomes a big hit. In this case, a ready-to-win effect (character effect) indicating a big win is executed along with the variable display of the identification information without executing the "rush effect" and/or the "achievement effect". This prevents the time before the start of the big win from becoming redundant by executing the ``rush performance'' and/or the ``achievement performance'' and then further executing the ready-to-win performance, thereby reducing the interest in the game. can be prevented.

Also, when the "rush effect" and/or "achievement effect" are executed, the game state shifts from the first specific state to a more advantageous game state, and the result of the first variation display of the identification information (special symbol The result of the pass/fail judgment) is out. When the game state shifts from the first specific state to a more advantageous game state, the execution time of the first variable display of the identification information is determined if the result of the variable display of the identification information (the result of the special symbol suitability determination) is out. , a fixed time (predetermined specific time) is set, and the "rush effect" and/or the "achievement effect" are always executed.

In the second count effect, the first display identification information is variably displayed, and in the second count effect, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the first display identification information is stopped and displayed, and the game state is terminated. When transitioning, do not execute rush production,
In the game state after transition from the second specific state, the first display identification information may be variably displayed.

Also, even if a plurality of first display identification information to be used in a game state (first time saving state, low base state) disadvantageous than an advantageous game state (second time saving state) using the second display identification information good. Specifically, the second first display in the second specific state (first time saving state) that includes the first first display identification information and the second first display identification information and executes the second count effect Using the identification information (production pattern for time saving), even if the first display identification information (production pattern for normal state) is used in the game state (low base state, normal state) that shifts from the second specific state good. That is, the first display identification information is also used as a generic term for identification information used in a game state more disadvantageous than the second display identification information.

In addition, as a game effect, it has an achievement effect indicating that the condition for shifting the game state is satisfied by executing the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times,
When the first count effect is executed, the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game state is changed from the first specific state to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific state. When shifting to the game state, the achievement effect is executed,
When the second count effect is executed, the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game state is changed from the second specific state to a more disadvantageous situation for the player than the second specific state. When shifting to the game state, the achievement effect may not be executed.

In addition, the result of the variable ball entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and the variable display of the identification information are the specific results. A special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state may be provided. The predetermined condition may be established based on the ball entering the starting hole. Further, it comprises a right/wrong determination means for performing a right/wrong determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the right/wrong determination result. The game machine may stop and display the identification information in a specific manner to execute a special game.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of game interest by providing game presentations in various presentation modes and new presentation modes.

(Reference Invention 5)
The present reference invention 5 provides a game machine that provides game effects in various forms and enhances the interest in the game by means of a new effect mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
game state setting means for setting a game state;
a game effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
As the game state, having a first specific state (normal state),
The game effect is an effect executed in the first specific state, and has a first remaining period display unit that indicates the remaining period during which the first specific state is executed by the number of times of variable display of the identification information. Has a first count effect (play time transition effect, count mode),
Having the identification result and the deviation as a result of the variable display of the identification information,
The first count effect is executed when the results of the variable display of the identification information are consecutively lost for the first number of times (500 times) after the special game ends,
In the first count effect, when the results of the variable display of the identification information are consecutively missed for the second number of times (50 times) and the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display section is exhausted, the game state is terminated. , a transition from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is the total number of times of the first number and the second number of times consecutively, even if the first count effect is not executed, the game state is changed to the first game state. It is characterized by shifting from the specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state.

According to such a gaming machine, the first count effect is executed in the first specific state and has the first remaining period display section. Further, the first count effect is started when the loss variation is continuously executed for the first number of times after the end of the special game, and the first count effect is displayed after the loss variation is continuously performed for the second number of times in the first count effect. When the remaining period of the part runs out, the game state becomes more advantageous than the first specific state. Further, even when the first count effect is not executed, if the loss variation is continuously executed for the total number of the first number and the second number, the game state becomes more advantageous than the first specific state. . As a result, the player can continue playing the game without losing the desire to play the game even when the loss variation continues for a long period of time. Also, by diversifying the transition patterns to advantageous game states, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Also, the second number of times (for example, "50" times) is set to be less than the first number of times (for example, "500" times). Also, the number of times obtained by adding the first number of times and the second number of times is the number of times obtained by adding the first number of times and the second number of times (for example, “550” times).

In addition, the game machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
game state setting means for setting a game state;
a game effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
As the game state, having a first specific state,
The game effect is an effect executed in the first specific state, and has a first remaining period display unit that indicates the remaining period during which the first specific state is executed by the number of times of variable display of the identification information. Having the first count production,
Having the identification result and the deviation as a result of the variable display of the identification information,
The first count effect is executed when the result of the variable display of the identification information is out for the first number of consecutive times after the game state after the end of the special game becomes the first specific state,
In the first count effect, when the result of the variable display of the identification information is out for the second consecutive number of times and the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display unit is exhausted, the game state is changed to the first. The specific state is shifted to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state,
In the first specific state, if the result of the variable display of the identification information has failed consecutively for the total number of times of the first count and the second count, even if the first count effect is not executed. , the game state is shifted from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state.

According to such a gaming machine, the first count effect is executed in the first specific state and has the first remaining period display section. In addition, the first count effect is started when the loss variation is continuously executed for the first number of times in the first specific state after the end of the special game, and the loss variation is continuously performed for the second number of times in the first count effect. When the remaining period of the first remaining period display portion is exhausted, the game state becomes more advantageous than the first specific state. Further, even if the first count effect is not executed, it is more advantageous than the first specific state if the deviation variation is continuously executed for the total number of times of the first number and the second number in the first specific state. It becomes a game state. As a result, the player can continue playing the game without losing the desire to play the game even when the loss variation continues for a long period of time. Also, by diversifying the transition patterns to advantageous game states, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Also, the second number of times (for example, "50" times) is set to be less than the first number of times (for example, "500" times). Also, the number of times obtained by adding the first number of times and the second number of times is the number of times obtained by adding the first number of times and the second number of times (for example, “550” times). Further, in this example, the second specific state (high base state) may be set after the end of the special game. It is assumed that the counting of the first number of times is started after transitioning to the first specific state. Such a game machine is a model called a so-called ST machine, and is set to a high base state (or a high probability state) for a specific number of times (for example, 70 times) after the end of a jackpot game, and a special pattern eligibility for a specific number of times is set. When all determinations result in (continuously) failure, the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state (normal state).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
comprising a power supply means for supplying power,
After starting the supply of power by the power supply means, until the special game is executed, the first count effect is performed even if the result of the variable display of the identification information fails the first number of times consecutively. It is characterized by not executing

According to such a gaming machine, the first count effect is not executed from the start of power supply until the special game is executed, even if the loss variation continues for the first number of times, and the loss variation is the first. When the game is continuously executed for the sum of the number of times and the second number of times, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state without going through the first count effect. As a result, diversification of transition patterns to advantageous game states makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, the player can grasp whether or not the gaming machine has been initialized by the presence or absence of execution of the first count effect.

In addition, according to such a gaming machine, when the special game (jackpot game) is not executed even once after the power is turned on and the loss variation continues for the first number of times, the count effect is not executed. . In addition, the number of consecutive deviation fluctuations is backed up. When the sum of the two times is reached, the game state shifts from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
Provided with game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information,
When the game information storage means does not store the special game occurrence information, even if the results of the variable display of the identification information are out of the first number of times (500 times) consecutively, the first count effect is performed. is characterized by not executing

According to such a gaming machine, when the game information storage means does not store the occurrence information of the special game, the first count performance is not executed even when the loss variation continues for the first number of times, and the loss variation is performed. is continuously executed for the total number of times of the first count and the second count, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state without going through the first count performance. As a result, diversification of transition patterns to advantageous game states makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, the player can grasp whether or not the gaming machine has been initialized by the presence or absence of execution of the first count effect.

In addition, in the "special game occurrence information", information that can specify the time of occurrence of the previous special game (how many times the fluctuation display has been executed since the end of the special game, etc.), information related to the type of special game that occurred, etc. Contains information.

In addition, as a case where the first count effect is not executed even if the result of the variable display of the identification information is consecutively lost for the first number of times (500 times), the case where the special game occurrence information is not stored (i.e. , the game machine is in the initial state). When the game machine is in the initial state, it means that the game machine is in the state at the time of shipment, and a special game (jackpot game) has not yet occurred after shipment, or a game that has been stored in memory by performing RAM clear processing. It refers to a state in which the information has been erased and the game has started. In addition, when the result of the change display of the identification information is out for the first number of times (500 times) consecutively, the previous special game information (previous special game information flag). Then, when there is the previous special game information (the previous special game information flag is ON), the first count effect may be executed.

In addition, as a case in which the first count effect is not executed even if the result of the variable display of the identification information is consecutively missed for the first number of times (500 times), the power is cut off during the execution of the first count effect. occurs, if the power is supplied again (without erasing the game information), the predetermined timing (the first number of times, the second number of times, and is added), the game state may shift from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state.

Further, when the game state is the high base state when the result of the variable display of the identification information is the first number of consecutive times (500 times), the first count effect may not be executed. Also, in this case, the high base state is terminated by a predetermined timing (the number of times obtained by adding the first number and the second number of times (550 times)) and transitions to the low base state (for example, The maximum number of times of time saving is 530 times).

In addition, at the timing when the result of the variable display of the identification information is the first number of consecutive times (500 times) and the first count effect is started, the result of the special symbol propriety determination is the error and the specific game effect ( For example, when execution of highly reliable super reach effect is determined, execution of the super reach effect may be preferentially executed without executing the first count effect. Also, at this time, in the next variable display, the first count effect may be started, or the game is continued without performing the first count effect, and the predetermined timing (the first number of times and the The game state may shift from the first specific state to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state when the deviation fluctuation continues up to the number of times (550 times) obtained by adding the second number of times.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4,
game information erasing means capable of erasing the game information stored in the game information storage means;
The game information erasing means is capable of erasing the occurrence information of the special game stored in the game information storing means.

According to such a gaming machine, the game information erasing means capable of erasing the game information stored in the game information storing means is provided, and the special game occurrence information stored in the game information storing means is erased by the game information erasing means. Erasable. As a result, diversification of transition patterns to advantageous game states makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, the player can grasp whether or not the gaming machine has been initialized by the presence or absence of execution of the first count effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5,
a power supply means for supplying power;
storage holding means for storing and holding the game information stored in the game information storage means when a decrease in power is detected;
If the game information stored and held in the memory holding means is not erased when power is supplied by the power supply means, the game information including the occurrence information of the special game is restored and the game is started,
When the game information stored and held in the memory holding means is erased when power is supplied by the power supply means, the game information including the occurrence information of the special game is erased and the game is started. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the power supply means and the memory holding means for storing and holding the game information when the power is lowered are provided, and when the stored and held game information is not erased, the stored and held game information is stored. When the game is resumed and the game is started and the stored game information is erased, the game information including the occurrence information of the special game is erased and the game is started. As a result, diversification of transition patterns to advantageous game states makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, the player can grasp whether or not the gaming machine has been initialized by the presence or absence of execution of the first count effect.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high level of game interest by providing game presentations of various presentation modes and new presentation modes.

(Reference invention 6)
In addition, conventional gaming machines have a plurality of game effects with different execution modes as game effects (ready-to-win effects, character effects, etc.), and show different degrees of reliability for big wins depending on the game effects to be executed. As a result, the player's interest in the game is heightened when the game performance with high reliability of the big win is executed, and the interest in the game is further heightened when the big win is advantageous. In addition, as winning games, a plurality of types of winning games having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, and when an advantageous winning game is executed, the interest in the game is enhanced. In addition, it has a plurality of production modes with different display modes, and when the game state is shifted to a game state (time saving state or variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player after the end of the winning game, in the production mode executed in the game state, Some display the remaining period until the advantageous game state ends.

In the above-described gaming machines, although the game features are easy for the player to understand, the presentation mode is monotonous and does not increase the interest in the game. The present reference invention 6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a game machine which provides game performances in various modes of performance and enhances game interest by new game performances.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
game state setting means for setting a game state;
a game effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result (big hit),
As the game state, a first specific state (normal state, low base state), a second specific state different from the first specific state (time saving state, second time saving state, high base state),
The game state is shifted from the first specific state to the second specific state based on the establishment of the special condition,
The special condition is established when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific result (missing) consecutively for a specific number of times,
As the game effect, it has a remaining period notification effect for notifying the remaining period until the special condition is satisfied,
Having a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition as execution conditions for executing the remaining period notification effect,
It is characterized in that the remaining period notification effect can be executed both when the first execution condition is satisfied and when the second execution condition is satisfied.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state includes the first specific state and the second specific state, and if the result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific result (missing) continuously for a specific number of times. A special condition is established, and the game state shifts from the first specified state to the second specified state. In addition, as execution conditions for executing the remaining period notification effect for notifying the remaining period until the special condition is satisfied, there are a first execution condition and a second execution condition, and when either execution condition is satisfied Also executes the remaining period notification effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility of executing the remaining period notification performance for informing the remaining period up to the second specific state, diversify the execution pattern of the remaining period notification performance, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
As the remaining period notification effects, a first remaining period notification effect (character display, range display), and a second remaining period notification effect (remaining period display, number of times display) different in display mode from the first remaining period notification effect, has
The first remaining period notification effect is executed when the first execution condition is satisfied, and the second remaining period notification effect is executed when the second execution condition is satisfied. be.

According to such a gaming machine, it has the first remaining period notification effect and the second remaining period notification effect having a display mode different from that of the first remaining period notification effect. When the remaining period notification effect is executed based on the establishment of the first execution condition, the first remaining period notification effect is executed, and the remaining period notification effect is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition. In the case of execution, the second remaining period notification effect is executed. As a result, the display mode (execution mode) of the remaining period informing performance differs depending on the execution conditions established when the remaining period informing performance is executed, thereby diversifying the execution pattern of the remaining period informing performance and increasing the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

The first execution condition may be a condition that is easier to be satisfied than the second execution condition (the second execution condition is a condition that is more difficult to be satisfied than the first execution condition). As a result, although the first execution condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second execution condition, the possibility of executing the remaining period notification effect (first remaining period notification effect) is lower (than the second remaining period notification effect) (for example, , 50%), and although the second execution condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first execution condition, the possibility of execution of the remaining period notification effect (second remaining period notification effect) is high (for example, 100%). As a result, satisfaction of different execution conditions and execution of the remaining period notification effect are expected, and the interest in the game is heightened. In addition, the possibility of execution of the remaining period notification effect (second remaining period notification effect) executed when the second execution condition is satisfied is not limited to 100%, and may be set to 80% or the like (not executed). may be the case). Further, a notification performance execution determination means is provided, and the notification performance execution determination means executes the remaining period notification performance with a predetermined probability (possibility) when one execution condition is satisfied or when a second execution condition is satisfied. It may be determined whether

Further, the first remaining period notification effect may be executed when the first execution condition is satisfied and the number of fluctuation display times remaining until the chance period is within a predetermined number of times (for example, within 150 times). good. In addition, if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the first remaining period notification effect may not be executed even if the first execution condition is satisfied after the power is turned on (for example, 50 times of consecutive failure fluctuations). . As a result, by executing the first remaining period notification effect, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game parlor is performing RAM clearing (initialization processing) when the power is turned on, and it is possible to increase the willingness to play. In addition, in the first remaining period notification effect, when the first execution condition (for example, 50 consecutive fluctuations after turning on the power) is satisfied, the number of times of remaining fluctuation display until the chance period is within a predetermined number (for example, 150 times), it may be executed.

Further, the first remaining period notification effect and the second remaining period notification effect may differ in the remaining period notification mode. For example, in the first remaining period notification effect, by displaying a predetermined character, the display of the character indicates that the remaining period (number of fluctuations) until the special condition is satisfied is within the special number of times (for example, 150 times). , that is, a notification mode that indirectly indicates that the occurrence of the chance period (the establishment of the special condition) is approaching to some extent. The second remaining period notification effect is to display the number of times of remaining fluctuation display until the chance period (for example, display of "255 times left and chance period"). It is also possible to adopt a notification mode that directly indicates whether or not.

As a result, although the first execution condition (for example, 50 times of consecutive failure fluctuations after power-on) is likely to be satisfied, the first remaining period notification effect executed based on the establishment of the first execution condition is the remaining period (remaining number of times, Since the number of times of variable display is not directly displayed, but is indirectly notified by the character, it is difficult to recognize it unless the game characteristics and game effects are understood. On the other hand, although the second execution condition (for example, 100 times of consecutive failure fluctuations after power-on) is unlikely to be satisfied, the second remaining period notification effect executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition is the remaining period (remaining number of times, Since the number of variable displays) is directly displayed, the remaining period until the chance period can be easily grasped even if the game characteristics and game performance are not grasped. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify game characteristics and presentation modes and enhance game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2,
The first remaining period notification effect is executed with a first possibility when the first execution condition is satisfied,
The second remaining period notification effect is characterized by being executed with a second possibility higher than the first possibility when the second execution condition is satisfied.

According to such a gaming machine, the first remaining period notification effect is executed with the first possibility when the first execution condition is satisfied, and the second remaining period notification effect is executed when the second execution condition is satisfied. In some cases, the second probability is higher than the first probability. In other words, the first remaining period information effect is not necessarily executed when the first execution condition is satisfied, but the first remaining period information effect is executed when conditions other than the first execution condition are satisfied. be. Further, the second remaining period information effect is executed with a higher possibility when the second execution condition is satisfied than the first remaining period information effect is executed when the first execution condition is satisfied. be. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution patterns of the remaining period notification effect and enhance the interest in the game.

Also assume that the first possibility is lower than the second possibility. Alternatively, the first possibility may be higher than the second possibility. According to this, the first remaining period notification effect is executed with the first possibility when the first execution condition is satisfied, and the second remaining period notification effect is executed with the first possibility when the second execution condition is satisfied. Suppose it runs with a second probability that is lower than the probability.

In addition, the first remaining period notification effect is, when the first execution condition (for example, when the power is turned off and the fluctuation is continuously executed 50 times), the remaining period until the chance period (the number of fluctuation display times remaining) is , may be executed within a predetermined number of times (for example, within 150 times). Also, the second remaining period notification effect may be (always) executed when the second execution condition (for example, when the power is turned off and the variation is continuously executed 100 times) is satisfied.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3,
The first execution condition is satisfied at least on the condition that the result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific result (missing) for a first specific number of times in succession,
The second execution condition is satisfied at least on the condition that the result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific result (outlier) for a second specific number of times different from the first specific number of times. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the first execution condition is met on the condition that at least the result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific result for the first specific number of times in succession, and the second execution condition shall be satisfied at least on the condition that the result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific result for the second specific number of times in succession. As a result, the execution condition for executing the remaining period notification effect can be satisfied with a different number of execution times in which the result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific result, so that the execution pattern of the remaining period notification effect is diversified, It is possible to enhance amusement in the game.

Also, the second specified number of times (for example, 100 times) is set to be greater than the first specified number of times (for example, 50 times). That is, it is assumed that the first execution condition is satisfied before the second execution condition. Alternatively, the second specific number of times may be less than the first specific number of times.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3,
The first execution condition is satisfied at least on the condition that the results of the variable display of the identification information from power-on continuously become a non-specific result (outlier) for a first specific number of times,
The second execution condition is satisfied at least on the condition that the result of the variable display of the identification information from power-on continuously becomes a second specified number of times different from the first specified number of times and a non-specified result (outlier). It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, the first execution condition is established on the condition that at least the result of the variable display of the identification information after the power is turned on is a non-specific result continuously for the first specific number of times. 2 Execution condition shall be satisfied at least on the condition that the result of the variable display of the identification information from power-on continuously becomes a non-specific result for the second specific number of times. As a result, the execution condition for executing the remaining period notification effect can be satisfied with different numbers of execution times in which the result of the variable display of the identification information after the power is turned on is a non-specific result, so the execution pattern of the remaining period notification effect It is possible to diversify the game and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-5,
A variable ball entrance (second starting opening, variable starting opening) that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first mode,
A first frequency state (low base state) in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable entrance is the first frequency, and a second frequency state (high base state) in which the frequency of ball entry is higher than the first frequency state. and a settable ball entry frequency setting means,
The first specific state is the first frequency state, and the second specific state is the second frequency state.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first frequency state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable ball opening is the first frequency, and a second frequency state in which the frequency of ball entry is higher than the first frequency state. The first specified state is the first frequency state, and the second specified state is the second frequency state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the patterns of changes in the game state accompanying the count effect, and to increase the interest in the game in the count effect.

Further, as an execution condition for executing the remaining period notification effect, it has a third execution condition different from the first execution condition and the second execution condition,
The remaining period notification effect may be executed when the first execution condition is met, when the second execution condition is met, and when the third execution condition is met.

In addition, as the remaining period notification effect, a third remaining period notification effect (count mode, first count effect) having a display mode different from the first remaining period notification effect and the second remaining period notification effect is provided,
When the first execution condition is established, the first remaining period notification performance is executed, when the second execution condition is established, the second remaining period notification performance is executed, and when the third execution condition is established, the performance is executed. A third remaining period notification effect may be executed.

Further, the first remaining period notification effect is executed with the first possibility when the first execution condition is satisfied,
The second remaining period notification effect is executed with a second possibility (higher than the first possibility and different from the first possibility) when the second execution condition is satisfied,
It is assumed that the third remaining period notification effect is executed with the third possibility (different from the first possibility and the second possibility) when the third execution condition is met.

Also, the third remaining period notification effect is executed if the last special game information is stored when the third execution condition (for example, the first number of times (500 times) continuous loss variation) is satisfied. may be Further, the third remaining period notification effect may be executed (always) when the third execution condition is satisfied. Also, the first number of times is a number greater than both the first specific number of times and the second specific number of times. Moreover, the third execution condition may be established on the condition that at least the result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific result (missing) for the first number of consecutive times. Also, the third execution condition may be established on the condition that at least the result of the variable display of the identification information since the end of the previous special game is the non-specific result (loss) for the first number of times consecutively. . In addition, the third remaining period notification effect is provided when the third execution condition (for example, the first number of times (500 times) continuous loss fluctuation) is established, and the game state is the first specific state (low base state). , may be executed. Also, two or more of the execution conditions described above may be combined as execution conditions.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 6, it is possible to provide game performances in various modes of presentation, and to provide a gaming machine with high game interest by means of new game presentations.

(Reference Invention 7)
The present reference invention 7 provides a game machine that provides game effects in a variety of effects modes and enhances the interest in the game by means of a new effect mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
game state setting means for setting a game state;
a game effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
As the game state, having a first specific state (normal state),
As the game performance,
and a first count effect, which is an effect executed in the first specific state, and has a first remaining time display unit that indicates the remaining time during which the first specific state is executed by the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. , (play time transition effect)
a purpose accomplishing effect (a battle effect in which a first character (ally character) and a second character (enemy character) perform an effect by displaying a predetermined character),
In the case where the first count effect is executed, when the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display unit disappears by executing the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times (50 times), The game state is shifted from the first specific state to a game state (second specific state, time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state,
In the purpose fulfillment effect (battle effect) executed during a period other than the first count effect, when the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is executed (when the first character wins), the specified result is obtained. and execute the special game,
In the purpose fulfillment effect (battle effect) executed in the first count effect, if the effect (failure effect) that does not achieve the purpose is executed (the first character loses or the second character wins case), the specified result is obtained, the special game is executed, and the first count effect is terminated.

According to such a gaming machine, as the game effects, the first count effect executed in the first specific state and having the first remaining period display section, and the purpose accomplishing effect (the first character and a battle effect for performing the effect with the second character). In addition, the first count effect is started when the loss variation is continuously executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game. It becomes a game state more advantageous than the specific state. In addition, in the purpose accomplishment effect (battle effect) during the period other than the first count effect, when the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is executed (when the first character wins), the special game is executed, and the second character wins. In the battle performance in the 1-count performance, a special game is executed when a performance (failure performance) that does not achieve the purpose is executed (when the first character loses or the second character wins). As a result, depending on the execution timing (execution period) of the purpose fulfillment effect (battle effect), it is possible to change whether or not the special game is executed in response to the result of the purpose fulfillment effect (battle effect), diversify the game effect, and increase the game interest. It becomes possible. In addition, the character displayed in the purpose accomplishment effect may be a character such as a humanoid, robot, or animal type, or may be a character such as a mountain, a rock, a tree, a flower, or the like. It may be a shape character. In addition, the number of characters displayed in the purpose accomplishment effect may be one or may be plural.

In addition, in the purpose accomplishment effect (battle effect) executed in the first count effect, if the effect (failure effect) that does not achieve the purpose is executed (the first character is defeated or the second character wins case), a special game (jackpot game) may be executed as a specific result (jackpot). In addition to this, in the purpose performance effect (battle effect) executed in the first count effect, when the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is executed (when the first character wins), a specific result (jackpot ) and a special game (jackpot game) may be executed. In this case, there are relatively advantageous jackpots for the player (for example, special figure 1 jackpot A) and relatively unfavorable jackpots for the player (for example, special figure 1 jackpot C), and an effect that does not achieve the purpose. The special game executed when (failure effect) is executed (when the first character loses or when the second character wins) is a relatively disadvantageous jackpot (for example, special figure 1 jackpot C) The special game executed when the effect (successful effect) for achieving the objective is executed (when the first character wins) is a relatively advantageous jackpot (for example, special figure 1 jackpot A). is preferred. That is, in the purpose accomplishment effect (battle effect) in the first count effect, the effect (success effect) that achieves the purpose is executed (when the first character wins) and the effect that does not achieve the purpose (failure effect) is executed (when the second character wins). The types of jackpot games) are different.

In addition, in the purpose accomplishment effect (battle effect) executed during a period other than the first count effect, when the first character wins (the result of the special symbol propriety determination) becomes a specific result, a special game is executed, When the second character wins (when the first character loses), the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a failure and the special game is not executed.

In either case (both when a comparatively disadvantageous jackpot win and a comparatively advantageous jackpot win), the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display unit disappears and the game state changes to the first state. Transitioning to a game state (shifting to a chance period) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific state is more advantageous to the player (high possibility of obtaining a large profit). That is, during the execution of the first count effect, the game state is changed to the first specific state without the special game being executed, rather than the special game being executed and the first count effect (low base state) ending. There is a high possibility that the profit obtained by the player will be greater by shifting to a game state (second time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player (the average number of winning balls is large).

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The special game is not executed during execution of the first count effect, the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display part disappears, and the game state is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state. It is characterized in that the player is more profitable in the case of shifting to the game state than in the case of executing the special game during the execution of the first count effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the case where the remaining period of the first remaining period display unit disappears in the first count effect and the game state shifts to an advantageous game state is a special case during the execution of the first count effect. The profit is greater for the player than when the game is played. As a result, the player expects the execution of the special game before the execution of the first count performance, and expects that the special game will not occur during the execution of the first count performance. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
As the game state, having a second specific state (time saving state, high base state) different from the first specific state (normal state, low base state),
A second count effect (a second count effect ( It has a short production time, a variable production),
In the case where the second count effect is executed, when the remaining period displayed on the second remaining period display unit disappears by executing the variable display of the identification information a predetermined number of times, the game state changes to The game state is shifted from the second specific state to a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second specific state,
The period other than the first count effect is the execution period of the second count effect,
In the objective accomplishment effect (battle effect) executed in the second count effect, when the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is executed (when the first character wins), the specific result is obtained and the special game is performed. is executed, and the second count effect being executed is terminated.

According to such a gaming machine, the second count effect is executed in the second specific state and has the second remaining period display section. In the second count effect, the game state is changed to a disadvantageous game state when the remaining period displayed on the second remaining period display section is exhausted. In the second count effect, when the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is executed (when the first character wins), a special game is executed and the second count effect ends. As a result, it is possible to diversify execution patterns of purpose accomplishment effects (battle effects) in a plurality of count effects, and to increase the interest in the game. In addition, depending on the type of specific result (type of special game), the second count effect may be executed again after the special game ends.

In addition, in the purpose accomplishment effect (battle effect) executed during the execution of the second count effect, when the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is executed (the first character wins) (special symbol suitability determination result) is a specific result and the special game is executed, and if the effect (failure effect) that does not achieve the purpose is executed (if the first character loses or the second character wins), The result of the special symbol propriety determination is out and the special game is not executed. In addition, in the second count effect, when the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is executed (when the first character wins), the second count effect is ended, the special game is executed, and after the special game ends, the second count effect is executed again. A second count effect may be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-3,
In the purpose accomplishment effect (battle effect) executed in the first count effect, the effect for achieving the purpose (success effect) is not executed until at least the remaining period displayed in the first remaining period display unit is exhausted. In the case (when the first character and the second character cannot settle, the special effect (the effect in which the first character wins) is not executed), the game state is higher than the first specific state. It is characterized by shifting to a game state (second specific state, time saving state) that is advantageous to the game.

According to such a gaming machine, in the purpose accomplishment effect (battle effect) in the first count effect, the effect (success effect) for achieving the purpose is not executed until the remaining period of the first remaining period display unit is exhausted. In the case (when the first character and the second character do not settle), the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state (second specific state, time saving state). As a result, the player expects the performance to achieve the purpose (the first character wins) before the execution of the first count performance, and the performance to achieve the purpose is not executed during the execution of the first count performance. It is possible to provide a peculiar game property such as expecting (the first character does not win, the second character does not settle), and enhances the amusement of the game.

Also, in the first count effect, when a ready-to-win effect (for example, "3↓3") is executed, a display mode (such as a warning display) indicating a pinch state for a player who may experience a special game is displayed. It should be noted that the ready-to-win effect refers to a ready-to-win mode in which two of the three effect symbols are stopped at the same (matching) pattern and one of the effect symbols is variably displayed (for example, "3 ↓ 3 ”), which is a game effect in which an effect is performed by a character or the like. Also, if the ready-to-win effect is lost (“343”), the ready-to-win effect is ended and the first count effect is continued. On the other hand, if the ready-to-win effect results in a big hit (“333”), the first count effect is terminated and the big win game is executed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high level of interest in the game by means of a new presentation mode as well as providing game presentations in various presentation modes.

Also, two or more of the reference inventions 1 to 7 described above may be combined.

1 pachinko game machine, 7b production pattern display area (production pattern display unit), 8 production pattern, 20 first start opening, 21 second start opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control section), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a production first special figure suspension display, 103b production second special figure suspension display

Claims (1)

identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
game state setting means for setting a game state;
a game effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
As the game state, having a first specific state,
As the game performance,
and a first count effect, which is an effect executed in the first specific state, and has a first remaining time display unit that indicates the remaining time during which the first specific state is executed by the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. ,
and a battle effect for effecting with the first character and the second character,
In the case where the first count effect is executed, when the remaining period displayed on the first remaining period display unit disappears as a result of the variable display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times, the game state changes to A transition from the first specific state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the first specific state,
A gaming machine, wherein in the battle effect executed during a period other than the first count effect, the specific result is obtained and the special game is executed when the first character wins.

Images